ac4a073eab6e5e41d6575c597309a08ff44cf2f7
[binutils-gdb.git] / gas / doc / as.texi
1 \input texinfo @c -*-Texinfo-*-
2 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
3 @c UPDATE!! On future updates--
4 @c (1) check for new machine-dep cmdline options in
5 @c md_parse_option definitions in config/tc-*.c
6 @c (2) for platform-specific directives, examine md_pseudo_op
7 @c in config/tc-*.c
8 @c (3) for object-format specific directives, examine obj_pseudo_op
9 @c in config/obj-*.c
10 @c (4) portable directives in potable[] in read.c
11 @c %**start of header
12 @setfilename as.info
13 @c ---config---
14 @macro gcctabopt{body}
15 @code{\body\}
16 @end macro
17 @c defaults, config file may override:
18 @set have-stabs
19 @c ---
20 @c man begin NAME
21 @c ---
22 @include asconfig.texi
23 @include bfdver.texi
24 @c ---
25 @c man end
26 @c ---
27 @c common OR combinations of conditions
28 @ifset COFF
29 @set COFF-ELF
30 @end ifset
31 @ifset ELF
32 @set COFF-ELF
33 @end ifset
34 @ifset AOUT
35 @set aout
36 @end ifset
37 @ifset ARM/Thumb
38 @set ARM
39 @end ifset
40 @ifset Blackfin
41 @set Blackfin
42 @end ifset
43 @ifset BPF
44 @set BPF
45 @end ifset
46 @ifset H8/300
47 @set H8
48 @end ifset
49 @ifset SH
50 @set H8
51 @end ifset
52 @ifset HPPA
53 @set abnormal-separator
54 @end ifset
55 @c ------------
56 @ifset GENERIC
57 @settitle Using @value{AS}
58 @end ifset
59 @ifclear GENERIC
60 @settitle Using @value{AS} (@value{TARGET})
61 @end ifclear
62 @setchapternewpage odd
63 @c %**end of header
64
65 @c @smallbook
66 @c @set SMALL
67 @c WARE! Some of the machine-dependent sections contain tables of machine
68 @c instructions. Except in multi-column format, these tables look silly.
69 @c Unfortunately, Texinfo doesn't have a general-purpose multi-col format, so
70 @c the multi-col format is faked within @example sections.
71 @c
72 @c Again unfortunately, the natural size that fits on a page, for these tables,
73 @c is different depending on whether or not smallbook is turned on.
74 @c This matters, because of order: text flow switches columns at each page
75 @c break.
76 @c
77 @c The format faked in this source works reasonably well for smallbook,
78 @c not well for the default large-page format. This manual expects that if you
79 @c turn on @smallbook, you will also uncomment the "@set SMALL" to enable the
80 @c tables in question. You can turn on one without the other at your
81 @c discretion, of course.
82 @ifinfo
83 @set SMALL
84 @c the insn tables look just as silly in info files regardless of smallbook,
85 @c might as well show 'em anyways.
86 @end ifinfo
87
88 @ifnottex
89 @dircategory Software development
90 @direntry
91 * As: (as). The GNU assembler.
92 * Gas: (as). The GNU assembler.
93 @end direntry
94 @end ifnottex
95
96 @finalout
97 @syncodeindex ky cp
98
99 @copying
100 This file documents the GNU Assembler "@value{AS}".
101
102 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
103 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
104
105 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
106 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
107 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
108 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
109 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
110 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
111
112 @c man end
113 @end copying
114
115 @titlepage
116 @title Using @value{AS}
117 @subtitle The @sc{gnu} Assembler
118 @ifclear GENERIC
119 @subtitle for the @value{TARGET} family
120 @end ifclear
121 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
122 @sp 1
123 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
124 @end ifset
125 @sp 1
126 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
127 @sp 1
128 @sp 13
129 The Free Software Foundation Inc.@: thanks The Nice Computer
130 Company of Australia for loaning Dean Elsner to write the
131 first (Vax) version of @command{as} for Project @sc{gnu}.
132 The proprietors, management and staff of TNCCA thank FSF for
133 distracting the boss while they got some work
134 done.
135 @sp 3
136 @author Dean Elsner, Jay Fenlason & friends
137 @page
138 @tex
139 {\parskip=0pt
140 \hfill {\it Using {\tt @value{AS}}}\par
141 \hfill Edited by Cygnus Support\par
142 }
143 %"boxit" macro for figures:
144 %Modified from Knuth's ``boxit'' macro from TeXbook (answer to exercise 21.3)
145 \gdef\boxit#1#2{\vbox{\hrule\hbox{\vrule\kern3pt
146 \vbox{\parindent=0pt\parskip=0pt\hsize=#1\kern3pt\strut\hfil
147 #2\hfil\strut\kern3pt}\kern3pt\vrule}\hrule}}%box with visible outline
148 \gdef\ibox#1#2{\hbox to #1{#2\hfil}\kern8pt}% invisible box
149 @end tex
150
151 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
152 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
153
154 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
155 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
156 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
157 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
158 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
159 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
160
161 @end titlepage
162 @contents
163
164 @ifnottex
165 @node Top
166 @top Using @value{AS}
167
168 This file is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}
169 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
170 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
171 @end ifset
172 version @value{VERSION}.
173 @ifclear GENERIC
174 This version of the file describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
175 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
176 @end ifclear
177
178 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
179 Documentation License. A copy of the license is included in the
180 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
181
182 @menu
183 * Overview:: Overview
184 * Invoking:: Command-Line Options
185 * Syntax:: Syntax
186 * Sections:: Sections and Relocation
187 * Symbols:: Symbols
188 * Expressions:: Expressions
189 * Pseudo Ops:: Assembler Directives
190 @ifset ELF
191 * Object Attributes:: Object Attributes
192 @end ifset
193 * Machine Dependencies:: Machine Dependent Features
194 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
195 * Acknowledgements:: Who Did What
196 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
197 * AS Index:: AS Index
198 @end menu
199 @end ifnottex
200
201 @node Overview
202 @chapter Overview
203 @iftex
204 This manual is a user guide to the @sc{gnu} assembler @command{@value{AS}}.
205 @ifclear GENERIC
206 This version of the manual describes @command{@value{AS}} configured to generate
207 code for @value{TARGET} architectures.
208 @end ifclear
209 @end iftex
210
211 @cindex invocation summary
212 @cindex option summary
213 @cindex summary of options
214 Here is a brief summary of how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}. For details,
215 see @ref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}.
216
217 @c man title AS the portable GNU assembler.
218
219 @ignore
220 @c man begin SEEALSO
221 gcc(1), ld(1), and the Info entries for @file{binutils} and @file{ld}.
222 @c man end
223 @end ignore
224
225 @c We don't use deffn and friends for the following because they seem
226 @c to be limited to one line for the header.
227 @smallexample
228 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
229 @value{AS} [@b{-a}[@b{cdghlns}][=@var{file}]] [@b{--alternate}] [@b{-D}]
230 [@b{--compress-debug-sections}] [@b{--nocompress-debug-sections}]
231 [@b{--debug-prefix-map} @var{old}=@var{new}]
232 [@b{--defsym} @var{sym}=@var{val}] [@b{-f}] [@b{-g}] [@b{--gstabs}]
233 [@b{--gstabs+}] [@b{--gdwarf-<N>}] [@b{--gdwarf-sections}]
234 [@b{--gdwarf-cie-version}=@var{VERSION}]
235 [@b{--help}] [@b{-I} @var{dir}] [@b{-J}]
236 [@b{-K}] [@b{-L}] [@b{--listing-lhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
237 [@b{--listing-lhs-width2}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--listing-rhs-width}=@var{NUM}]
238 [@b{--listing-cont-lines}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--keep-locals}]
239 [@b{--no-pad-sections}]
240 [@b{-o} @var{objfile}] [@b{-R}]
241 [@b{--hash-size}=@var{NUM}] [@b{--reduce-memory-overheads}]
242 [@b{--statistics}]
243 [@b{-v}] [@b{-version}] [@b{--version}]
244 [@b{-W}] [@b{--warn}] [@b{--fatal-warnings}] [@b{-w}] [@b{-x}]
245 [@b{-Z}] [@b{@@@var{FILE}}]
246 [@b{--sectname-subst}] [@b{--size-check=[error|warning]}]
247 [@b{--elf-stt-common=[no|yes]}]
248 [@b{--generate-missing-build-notes=[no|yes]}]
249 [@b{--target-help}] [@var{target-options}]
250 [@b{--}|@var{files} @dots{}]
251 @c
252 @c man end
253 @c Target dependent options are listed below. Keep the list sorted.
254 @c Add an empty line for separation.
255 @c man begin TARGET
256 @ifset AARCH64
257
258 @emph{Target AArch64 options:}
259 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
260 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
261 @end ifset
262 @ifset ALPHA
263
264 @emph{Target Alpha options:}
265 [@b{-m@var{cpu}}]
266 [@b{-mdebug} | @b{-no-mdebug}]
267 [@b{-replace} | @b{-noreplace}]
268 [@b{-relax}] [@b{-g}] [@b{-G@var{size}}]
269 [@b{-F}] [@b{-32addr}]
270 @end ifset
271 @ifset ARC
272
273 @emph{Target ARC options:}
274 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
275 [@b{-mA6}|@b{-mARC600}|@b{-mARC601}|@b{-mA7}|@b{-mARC700}|@b{-mEM}|@b{-mHS}]
276 [@b{-mcode-density}]
277 [@b{-mrelax}]
278 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
279 @end ifset
280 @ifset ARM
281
282 @emph{Target ARM options:}
283 @c Don't document the deprecated options
284 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
285 [@b{-march}=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]]
286 [@b{-mfpu}=@var{floating-point-format}]
287 [@b{-mfloat-abi}=@var{abi}]
288 [@b{-meabi}=@var{ver}]
289 [@b{-mthumb}]
290 [@b{-EB}|@b{-EL}]
291 [@b{-mapcs-32}|@b{-mapcs-26}|@b{-mapcs-float}|
292 @b{-mapcs-reentrant}]
293 [@b{-mthumb-interwork}] [@b{-k}]
294 @end ifset
295 @ifset Blackfin
296
297 @emph{Target Blackfin options:}
298 [@b{-mcpu}=@var{processor}[-@var{sirevision}]]
299 [@b{-mfdpic}]
300 [@b{-mno-fdpic}]
301 [@b{-mnopic}]
302 @end ifset
303 @ifset BPF
304
305 @emph{Target BPF options:}
306 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}]
307 @end ifset
308 @ifset CRIS
309
310 @emph{Target CRIS options:}
311 [@b{--underscore} | @b{--no-underscore}]
312 [@b{--pic}] [@b{-N}]
313 [@b{--emulation=criself} | @b{--emulation=crisaout}]
314 [@b{--march=v0_v10} | @b{--march=v10} | @b{--march=v32} | @b{--march=common_v10_v32}]
315 @c Deprecated -- deliberately not documented.
316 @c [@b{-h}] [@b{-H}]
317 @end ifset
318 @ifset CSKY
319
320 @emph{Target C-SKY options:}
321 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
322 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-mlittle-endian}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-mbig-endian}]
323 [@b{-fpic}] [@b{-pic}]
324 [@b{-mljump}] [@b{-mno-ljump}]
325 [@b{-force2bsr}] [@b{-mforce2bsr}] [@b{-no-force2bsr}] [@b{-mno-force2bsr}]
326 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-mjsri2bsr}] [@b{-no-jsri2bsr }] [@b{-mno-jsri2bsr}]
327 [@b{-mnolrw }] [@b{-mno-lrw}]
328 [@b{-melrw}] [@b{-mno-elrw}]
329 [@b{-mlaf }] [@b{-mliterals-after-func}]
330 [@b{-mno-laf}] [@b{-mno-literals-after-func}]
331 [@b{-mlabr}] [@b{-mliterals-after-br}]
332 [@b{-mno-labr}] [@b{-mnoliterals-after-br}]
333 [@b{-mistack}] [@b{-mno-istack}]
334 [@b{-mhard-float}] [@b{-mmp}] [@b{-mcp}] [@b{-mcache}]
335 [@b{-msecurity}] [@b{-mtrust}]
336 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-medsp}] [@b{-mvdsp}]
337 @end ifset
338 @ifset D10V
339
340 @emph{Target D10V options:}
341 [@b{-O}]
342 @end ifset
343 @ifset D30V
344
345 @emph{Target D30V options:}
346 [@b{-O}|@b{-n}|@b{-N}]
347 @end ifset
348 @ifset EPIPHANY
349
350 @emph{Target EPIPHANY options:}
351 [@b{-mepiphany}|@b{-mepiphany16}]
352 @end ifset
353 @ifset H8
354
355 @emph{Target H8/300 options:}
356 [-h-tick-hex]
357 @end ifset
358 @ifset HPPA
359 @c HPPA has no machine-dependent assembler options (yet).
360 @end ifset
361 @ifset I80386
362
363 @emph{Target i386 options:}
364 [@b{--32}|@b{--x32}|@b{--64}] [@b{-n}]
365 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}[+@var{EXTENSION}@dots{}]] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}]
366 @end ifset
367 @ifset IA64
368
369 @emph{Target IA-64 options:}
370 [@b{-mconstant-gp}|@b{-mauto-pic}]
371 [@b{-milp32}|@b{-milp64}|@b{-mlp64}|@b{-mp64}]
372 [@b{-mle}|@b{mbe}]
373 [@b{-mtune=itanium1}|@b{-mtune=itanium2}]
374 [@b{-munwind-check=warning}|@b{-munwind-check=error}]
375 [@b{-mhint.b=ok}|@b{-mhint.b=warning}|@b{-mhint.b=error}]
376 [@b{-x}|@b{-xexplicit}] [@b{-xauto}] [@b{-xdebug}]
377 @end ifset
378 @ifset IP2K
379
380 @emph{Target IP2K options:}
381 [@b{-mip2022}|@b{-mip2022ext}]
382 @end ifset
383 @ifset M32C
384
385 @emph{Target M32C options:}
386 [@b{-m32c}|@b{-m16c}] [-relax] [-h-tick-hex]
387 @end ifset
388 @ifset M32R
389
390 @emph{Target M32R options:}
391 [@b{--m32rx}|@b{--[no-]warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts}|
392 @b{--W[n]p}]
393 @end ifset
394 @ifset M680X0
395
396 @emph{Target M680X0 options:}
397 [@b{-l}] [@b{-m68000}|@b{-m68010}|@b{-m68020}|@dots{}]
398 @end ifset
399 @ifset M68HC11
400
401 @emph{Target M68HC11 options:}
402 [@b{-m68hc11}|@b{-m68hc12}|@b{-m68hcs12}|@b{-mm9s12x}|@b{-mm9s12xg}]
403 [@b{-mshort}|@b{-mlong}]
404 [@b{-mshort-double}|@b{-mlong-double}]
405 [@b{--force-long-branches}] [@b{--short-branches}]
406 [@b{--strict-direct-mode}] [@b{--print-insn-syntax}]
407 [@b{--print-opcodes}] [@b{--generate-example}]
408 @end ifset
409 @ifset MCORE
410
411 @emph{Target MCORE options:}
412 [@b{-jsri2bsr}] [@b{-sifilter}] [@b{-relax}]
413 [@b{-mcpu=[210|340]}]
414 @end ifset
415 @ifset METAG
416
417 @emph{Target Meta options:}
418 [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mfpu=@var{cpu}}] [@b{-mdsp=@var{cpu}}]
419 @end ifset
420 @ifset MICROBLAZE
421 @emph{Target MICROBLAZE options:}
422 @c MicroBlaze has no machine-dependent assembler options.
423 @end ifset
424 @ifset MIPS
425
426 @emph{Target MIPS options:}
427 [@b{-nocpp}] [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}[@var{optimization level}]]
428 [@b{-g}[@var{debug level}]] [@b{-G} @var{num}] [@b{-KPIC}] [@b{-call_shared}]
429 [@b{-non_shared}] [@b{-xgot} [@b{-mvxworks-pic}]
430 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}] [@b{-32}] [@b{-n32}] [@b{-64}] [@b{-mfp32}] [@b{-mgp32}]
431 [@b{-mfp64}] [@b{-mgp64}] [@b{-mfpxx}]
432 [@b{-modd-spreg}] [@b{-mno-odd-spreg}]
433 [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mtune}=@var{CPU}] [@b{-mips1}] [@b{-mips2}]
434 [@b{-mips3}] [@b{-mips4}] [@b{-mips5}] [@b{-mips32}] [@b{-mips32r2}]
435 [@b{-mips32r3}] [@b{-mips32r5}] [@b{-mips32r6}] [@b{-mips64}] [@b{-mips64r2}]
436 [@b{-mips64r3}] [@b{-mips64r5}] [@b{-mips64r6}]
437 [@b{-construct-floats}] [@b{-no-construct-floats}]
438 [@b{-mignore-branch-isa}] [@b{-mno-ignore-branch-isa}]
439 [@b{-mnan=@var{encoding}}]
440 [@b{-trap}] [@b{-no-break}] [@b{-break}] [@b{-no-trap}]
441 [@b{-mips16}] [@b{-no-mips16}]
442 [@b{-mmips16e2}] [@b{-mno-mips16e2}]
443 [@b{-mmicromips}] [@b{-mno-micromips}]
444 [@b{-msmartmips}] [@b{-mno-smartmips}]
445 [@b{-mips3d}] [@b{-no-mips3d}]
446 [@b{-mdmx}] [@b{-no-mdmx}]
447 [@b{-mdsp}] [@b{-mno-dsp}]
448 [@b{-mdspr2}] [@b{-mno-dspr2}]
449 [@b{-mdspr3}] [@b{-mno-dspr3}]
450 [@b{-mmsa}] [@b{-mno-msa}]
451 [@b{-mxpa}] [@b{-mno-xpa}]
452 [@b{-mmt}] [@b{-mno-mt}]
453 [@b{-mmcu}] [@b{-mno-mcu}]
454 [@b{-mcrc}] [@b{-mno-crc}]
455 [@b{-mginv}] [@b{-mno-ginv}]
456 [@b{-mloongson-mmi}] [@b{-mno-loongson-mmi}]
457 [@b{-mloongson-cam}] [@b{-mno-loongson-cam}]
458 [@b{-mloongson-ext}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext}]
459 [@b{-mloongson-ext2}] [@b{-mno-loongson-ext2}]
460 [@b{-minsn32}] [@b{-mno-insn32}]
461 [@b{-mfix7000}] [@b{-mno-fix7000}]
462 [@b{-mfix-rm7000}] [@b{-mno-fix-rm7000}]
463 [@b{-mfix-vr4120}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4120}]
464 [@b{-mfix-vr4130}] [@b{-mno-fix-vr4130}]
465 [@b{-mfix-r5900}] [@b{-mno-fix-r5900}]
466 [@b{-mdebug}] [@b{-no-mdebug}]
467 [@b{-mpdr}] [@b{-mno-pdr}]
468 @end ifset
469 @ifset MMIX
470
471 @emph{Target MMIX options:}
472 [@b{--fixed-special-register-names}] [@b{--globalize-symbols}]
473 [@b{--gnu-syntax}] [@b{--relax}] [@b{--no-predefined-symbols}]
474 [@b{--no-expand}] [@b{--no-merge-gregs}] [@b{-x}]
475 [@b{--linker-allocated-gregs}]
476 @end ifset
477 @ifset NIOSII
478
479 @emph{Target Nios II options:}
480 [@b{-relax-all}] [@b{-relax-section}] [@b{-no-relax}]
481 [@b{-EB}] [@b{-EL}]
482 @end ifset
483 @ifset NDS32
484
485 @emph{Target NDS32 options:}
486 [@b{-EL}] [@b{-EB}] [@b{-O}] [@b{-Os}] [@b{-mcpu=@var{cpu}}]
487 [@b{-misa=@var{isa}}] [@b{-mabi=@var{abi}}] [@b{-mall-ext}]
488 [@b{-m[no-]16-bit}] [@b{-m[no-]perf-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]perf2-ext}]
489 [@b{-m[no-]string-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]dsp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]mac}] [@b{-m[no-]div}]
490 [@b{-m[no-]audio-isa-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-sp-ext}] [@b{-m[no-]fpu-dp-ext}]
491 [@b{-m[no-]fpu-fma}] [@b{-mfpu-freg=@var{FREG}}] [@b{-mreduced-regs}]
492 [@b{-mfull-regs}] [@b{-m[no-]dx-regs}] [@b{-mpic}] [@b{-mno-relax}]
493 [@b{-mb2bb}]
494 @end ifset
495 @ifset OPENRISC
496 @c OpenRISC has no machine-dependent assembler options.
497 @end ifset
498 @ifset PDP11
499
500 @emph{Target PDP11 options:}
501 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}] [@b{-mall}] [@b{-mno-extensions}]
502 [@b{-m}@var{extension}|@b{-mno-}@var{extension}]
503 [@b{-m}@var{cpu}] [@b{-m}@var{machine}]
504 @end ifset
505 @ifset PJ
506
507 @emph{Target picoJava options:}
508 [@b{-mb}|@b{-me}]
509 @end ifset
510 @ifset PPC
511
512 @emph{Target PowerPC options:}
513 [@b{-a32}|@b{-a64}]
514 [@b{-mpwrx}|@b{-mpwr2}|@b{-mpwr}|@b{-m601}|@b{-mppc}|@b{-mppc32}|@b{-m603}|@b{-m604}|@b{-m403}|@b{-m405}|
515 @b{-m440}|@b{-m464}|@b{-m476}|@b{-m7400}|@b{-m7410}|@b{-m7450}|@b{-m7455}|@b{-m750cl}|@b{-mgekko}|
516 @b{-mbroadway}|@b{-mppc64}|@b{-m620}|@b{-me500}|@b{-e500x2}|@b{-me500mc}|@b{-me500mc64}|@b{-me5500}|
517 @b{-me6500}|@b{-mppc64bridge}|@b{-mbooke}|@b{-mpower4}|@b{-mpwr4}|@b{-mpower5}|@b{-mpwr5}|@b{-mpwr5x}|
518 @b{-mpower6}|@b{-mpwr6}|@b{-mpower7}|@b{-mpwr7}|@b{-mpower8}|@b{-mpwr8}|@b{-mpower9}|@b{-mpwr9}@b{-ma2}|
519 @b{-mcell}|@b{-mspe}|@b{-mspe2}|@b{-mtitan}|@b{-me300}|@b{-mcom}]
520 [@b{-many}] [@b{-maltivec}|@b{-mvsx}|@b{-mhtm}|@b{-mvle}]
521 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
522 [@b{-mrelocatable}|@b{-mrelocatable-lib}|@b{-K PIC}] [@b{-memb}]
523 [@b{-mlittle}|@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-le}|@b{-mbig}|@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-be}]
524 [@b{-msolaris}|@b{-mno-solaris}]
525 [@b{-nops=@var{count}}]
526 @end ifset
527 @ifset PRU
528
529 @emph{Target PRU options:}
530 [@b{-link-relax}]
531 [@b{-mnolink-relax}]
532 [@b{-mno-warn-regname-label}]
533 @end ifset
534 @ifset RISCV
535
536 @emph{Target RISC-V options:}
537 [@b{-fpic}|@b{-fPIC}|@b{-fno-pic}]
538 [@b{-march}=@var{ISA}]
539 [@b{-mabi}=@var{ABI}]
540 @end ifset
541 @ifset RL78
542
543 @emph{Target RL78 options:}
544 [@b{-mg10}]
545 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
546 @end ifset
547 @ifset RX
548
549 @emph{Target RX options:}
550 [@b{-mlittle-endian}|@b{-mbig-endian}]
551 [@b{-m32bit-doubles}|@b{-m64bit-doubles}]
552 [@b{-muse-conventional-section-names}]
553 [@b{-msmall-data-limit}]
554 [@b{-mpid}]
555 [@b{-mrelax}]
556 [@b{-mint-register=@var{number}}]
557 [@b{-mgcc-abi}|@b{-mrx-abi}]
558 @end ifset
559 @ifset S390
560
561 @emph{Target s390 options:}
562 [@b{-m31}|@b{-m64}] [@b{-mesa}|@b{-mzarch}] [@b{-march}=@var{CPU}]
563 [@b{-mregnames}|@b{-mno-regnames}]
564 [@b{-mwarn-areg-zero}]
565 @end ifset
566 @ifset SCORE
567
568 @emph{Target SCORE options:}
569 [@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}][@b{-FIXDD}][@b{-NWARN}]
570 [@b{-SCORE5}][@b{-SCORE5U}][@b{-SCORE7}][@b{-SCORE3}]
571 [@b{-march=score7}][@b{-march=score3}]
572 [@b{-USE_R1}][@b{-KPIC}][@b{-O0}][@b{-G} @var{num}][@b{-V}]
573 @end ifset
574 @ifset SPARC
575
576 @emph{Target SPARC options:}
577 @c The order here is important. See c-sparc.texi.
578 [@b{-Av6}|@b{-Av7}|@b{-Av8}|@b{-Aleon}|@b{-Asparclet}|@b{-Asparclite}
579 @b{-Av8plus}|@b{-Av8plusa}|@b{-Av8plusb}|@b{-Av8plusc}|@b{-Av8plusd}
580 @b{-Av8plusv}|@b{-Av8plusm}|@b{-Av9}|@b{-Av9a}|@b{-Av9b}|@b{-Av9c}
581 @b{-Av9d}|@b{-Av9e}|@b{-Av9v}|@b{-Av9m}|@b{-Asparc}|@b{-Asparcvis}
582 @b{-Asparcvis2}|@b{-Asparcfmaf}|@b{-Asparcima}|@b{-Asparcvis3}
583 @b{-Asparcvisr}|@b{-Asparc5}]
584 [@b{-xarch=v8plus}|@b{-xarch=v8plusa}]|@b{-xarch=v8plusb}|@b{-xarch=v8plusc}
585 @b{-xarch=v8plusd}|@b{-xarch=v8plusv}|@b{-xarch=v8plusm}|@b{-xarch=v9}
586 @b{-xarch=v9a}|@b{-xarch=v9b}|@b{-xarch=v9c}|@b{-xarch=v9d}|@b{-xarch=v9e}
587 @b{-xarch=v9v}|@b{-xarch=v9m}|@b{-xarch=sparc}|@b{-xarch=sparcvis}
588 @b{-xarch=sparcvis2}|@b{-xarch=sparcfmaf}|@b{-xarch=sparcima}
589 @b{-xarch=sparcvis3}|@b{-xarch=sparcvisr}|@b{-xarch=sparc5}
590 @b{-bump}]
591 [@b{-32}|@b{-64}]
592 [@b{--enforce-aligned-data}][@b{--dcti-couples-detect}]
593 @end ifset
594 @ifset TIC54X
595
596 @emph{Target TIC54X options:}
597 [@b{-mcpu=54[123589]}|@b{-mcpu=54[56]lp}] [@b{-mfar-mode}|@b{-mf}]
598 [@b{-merrors-to-file} @var{<filename>}|@b{-me} @var{<filename>}]
599 @end ifset
600 @ifset TIC6X
601
602 @emph{Target TIC6X options:}
603 [@b{-march=@var{arch}}] [@b{-mbig-endian}|@b{-mlittle-endian}]
604 [@b{-mdsbt}|@b{-mno-dsbt}] [@b{-mpid=no}|@b{-mpid=near}|@b{-mpid=far}]
605 [@b{-mpic}|@b{-mno-pic}]
606 @end ifset
607 @ifset TILEGX
608
609 @emph{Target TILE-Gx options:}
610 [@b{-m32}|@b{-m64}][@b{-EB}][@b{-EL}]
611 @end ifset
612 @ifset TILEPRO
613 @c TILEPro has no machine-dependent assembler options
614 @end ifset
615 @ifset VISIUM
616
617 @emph{Target Visium options:}
618 [@b{-mtune=@var{arch}}]
619 @end ifset
620 @ifset XTENSA
621
622 @emph{Target Xtensa options:}
623 [@b{--[no-]text-section-literals}] [@b{--[no-]auto-litpools}]
624 [@b{--[no-]absolute-literals}]
625 [@b{--[no-]target-align}] [@b{--[no-]longcalls}]
626 [@b{--[no-]transform}]
627 [@b{--rename-section} @var{oldname}=@var{newname}]
628 [@b{--[no-]trampolines}]
629 [@b{--abi-windowed}|@b{--abi-call0}]
630 @end ifset
631 @ifset Z80
632
633 @emph{Target Z80 options:}
634 [@b{-march=@var{CPU}@var{[-EXT]}@var{[+EXT]}}]
635 [@b{-local-prefix=}@var{PREFIX}]
636 [@b{-colonless}]
637 [@b{-sdcc}]
638 [@b{-fp-s=}@var{FORMAT}]
639 [@b{-fp-d=}@var{FORMAT}]
640 @end ifset
641 @ifset Z8000
642
643 @c Z8000 has no machine-dependent assembler options
644 @end ifset
645
646 @c man end
647 @end smallexample
648
649 @c man begin OPTIONS
650
651 @table @gcctabopt
652 @include at-file.texi
653
654 @item -a[cdghlmns]
655 Turn on listings, in any of a variety of ways:
656
657 @table @gcctabopt
658 @item -ac
659 omit false conditionals
660
661 @item -ad
662 omit debugging directives
663
664 @item -ag
665 include general information, like @value{AS} version and options passed
666
667 @item -ah
668 include high-level source
669
670 @item -al
671 include assembly
672
673 @item -am
674 include macro expansions
675
676 @item -an
677 omit forms processing
678
679 @item -as
680 include symbols
681
682 @item =file
683 set the name of the listing file
684 @end table
685
686 You may combine these options; for example, use @samp{-aln} for assembly
687 listing without forms processing. The @samp{=file} option, if used, must be
688 the last one. By itself, @samp{-a} defaults to @samp{-ahls}.
689
690 @item --alternate
691 Begin in alternate macro mode.
692 @ifclear man
693 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
694 @end ifclear
695
696 @item --compress-debug-sections
697 Compress DWARF debug sections using zlib with SHF_COMPRESSED from the
698 ELF ABI. The resulting object file may not be compatible with older
699 linkers and object file utilities. Note if compression would make a
700 given section @emph{larger} then it is not compressed.
701
702 @ifset ELF
703 @cindex @samp{--compress-debug-sections=} option
704 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
705 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
706 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
707 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
708 These options control how DWARF debug sections are compressed.
709 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} is equivalent to
710 @option{--nocompress-debug-sections}.
711 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} and
712 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi} are equivalent to
713 @option{--compress-debug-sections}.
714 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
715 sections using zlib. The debug sections are renamed to begin with
716 @samp{.zdebug}. Note if compression would make a given section
717 @emph{larger} then it is not compressed nor renamed.
718
719 @end ifset
720
721 @item --nocompress-debug-sections
722 Do not compress DWARF debug sections. This is usually the default for all
723 targets except the x86/x86_64, but a configure time option can be used to
724 override this.
725
726 @item -D
727 Ignored. This option is accepted for script compatibility with calls to
728 other assemblers.
729
730 @item --debug-prefix-map @var{old}=@var{new}
731 When assembling files in directory @file{@var{old}}, record debugging
732 information describing them as in @file{@var{new}} instead.
733
734 @item --defsym @var{sym}=@var{value}
735 Define the symbol @var{sym} to be @var{value} before assembling the input file.
736 @var{value} must be an integer constant. As in C, a leading @samp{0x}
737 indicates a hexadecimal value, and a leading @samp{0} indicates an octal
738 value. The value of the symbol can be overridden inside a source file via the
739 use of a @code{.set} pseudo-op.
740
741 @item -f
742 ``fast''---skip whitespace and comment preprocessing (assume source is
743 compiler output).
744
745 @item -g
746 @itemx --gen-debug
747 Generate debugging information for each assembler source line using whichever
748 debug format is preferred by the target. This currently means either STABS,
749 ECOFF or DWARF2.
750
751 @item --gstabs
752 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line. This
753 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it.
754
755 @item --gstabs+
756 Generate stabs debugging information for each assembler line, with GNU
757 extensions that probably only gdb can handle, and that could make other
758 debuggers crash or refuse to read your program. This
759 may help debugging assembler code. Currently the only GNU extension is
760 the location of the current working directory at assembling time.
761
762 @item --gdwarf-2
763 Generate DWARF2 debugging information for each assembler line. This
764 may help debugging assembler code, if the debugger can handle it. Note---this
765 option is only supported by some targets, not all of them.
766
767 @item --gdwarf-3
768 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
769 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
770 version 3 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
771 guarantee the generation of any extra infortmation, the choice to do so is on a
772 per target basis.
773
774 @item --gdwarf-4
775 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
776 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
777 version 4 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
778 guarantee the generation of any extra infortmation, the choice to do so is on a
779 per target basis.
780
781 @item --gdwarf-5
782 This option is the same as the @option{--gdwarf-2} option, except that it
783 allows for the possibility of the generation of extra debug information as per
784 version 5 of the DWARF specification. Note - enabling this option does not
785 guarantee the generation of any extra infortmation, the choice to do so is on a
786 per target basis.
787
788 @item --gdwarf-sections
789 Instead of creating a .debug_line section, create a series of
790 .debug_line.@var{foo} sections where @var{foo} is the name of the
791 corresponding code section. For example a code section called @var{.text.func}
792 will have its dwarf line number information placed into a section called
793 @var{.debug_line.text.func}. If the code section is just called @var{.text}
794 then debug line section will still be called just @var{.debug_line} without any
795 suffix.
796
797 @item --gdwarf-cie-version=@var{version}
798 Control which version of DWARF Common Information Entries (CIEs) are produced.
799 When this flag is not specificed the default is version 1, though some targets
800 can modify this default. Other possible values for @var{version} are 3 or 4.
801
802 @ifset ELF
803 @item --size-check=error
804 @itemx --size-check=warning
805 Issue an error or warning for invalid ELF .size directive.
806
807 @item --elf-stt-common=no
808 @itemx --elf-stt-common=yes
809 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate common
810 symbols with the @code{STT_COMMON} type. The default can be controlled
811 by a configure option @option{--enable-elf-stt-common}.
812
813 @item --generate-missing-build-notes=yes
814 @itemx --generate-missing-build-notes=no
815 These options control whether the ELF assembler should generate GNU Build
816 attribute notes if none are present in the input sources.
817 The default can be controlled by the @option{--enable-generate-build-notes}
818 configure option.
819
820 @end ifset
821
822 @item --help
823 Print a summary of the command-line options and exit.
824
825 @item --target-help
826 Print a summary of all target specific options and exit.
827
828 @item -I @var{dir}
829 Add directory @var{dir} to the search list for @code{.include} directives.
830
831 @item -J
832 Don't warn about signed overflow.
833
834 @item -K
835 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
836 This option is accepted but has no effect on the @value{TARGET} family.
837 @end ifclear
838 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
839 Issue warnings when difference tables altered for long displacements.
840 @end ifset
841
842 @item -L
843 @itemx --keep-locals
844 Keep (in the symbol table) local symbols. These symbols start with
845 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
846 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.
847 @ifclear man
848 @xref{Symbol Names}.
849 @end ifclear
850
851 @item --listing-lhs-width=@var{number}
852 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for an assembler
853 listing to @var{number}.
854
855 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@var{number}
856 Set the maximum width, in words, of the output data column for continuation
857 lines in an assembler listing to @var{number}.
858
859 @item --listing-rhs-width=@var{number}
860 Set the maximum width of an input source line, as displayed in a listing, to
861 @var{number} bytes.
862
863 @item --listing-cont-lines=@var{number}
864 Set the maximum number of lines printed in a listing for a single line of input
865 to @var{number} + 1.
866
867 @item --no-pad-sections
868 Stop the assembler for padding the ends of output sections to the alignment
869 of that section. The default is to pad the sections, but this can waste space
870 which might be needed on targets which have tight memory constraints.
871
872 @item -o @var{objfile}
873 Name the object-file output from @command{@value{AS}} @var{objfile}.
874
875 @item -R
876 Fold the data section into the text section.
877
878 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
879 Set the default size of GAS's hash tables to a prime number close to
880 @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of time it takes the
881 assembler to perform its tasks, at the expense of increasing the assembler's
882 memory requirements. Similarly reducing this value can reduce the memory
883 requirements at the expense of speed.
884
885 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
886 This option reduces GAS's memory requirements, at the expense of making the
887 assembly processes slower. Currently this switch is a synonym for
888 @samp{--hash-size=4051}, but in the future it may have other effects as well.
889
890 @ifset ELF
891 @item --sectname-subst
892 Honor substitution sequences in section names.
893 @ifclear man
894 @xref{Section Name Substitutions,,@code{.section @var{name}}}.
895 @end ifclear
896 @end ifset
897
898 @item --statistics
899 Print the maximum space (in bytes) and total time (in seconds) used by
900 assembly.
901
902 @item --strip-local-absolute
903 Remove local absolute symbols from the outgoing symbol table.
904
905 @item -v
906 @itemx -version
907 Print the @command{as} version.
908
909 @item --version
910 Print the @command{as} version and exit.
911
912 @item -W
913 @itemx --no-warn
914 Suppress warning messages.
915
916 @item --fatal-warnings
917 Treat warnings as errors.
918
919 @item --warn
920 Don't suppress warning messages or treat them as errors.
921
922 @item -w
923 Ignored.
924
925 @item -x
926 Ignored.
927
928 @item -Z
929 Generate an object file even after errors.
930
931 @item -- | @var{files} @dots{}
932 Standard input, or source files to assemble.
933
934 @end table
935 @c man end
936
937 @ifset AARCH64
938
939 @ifclear man
940 @xref{AArch64 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
941 for the 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
942 @end ifclear
943
944 @ifset man
945 @c man begin OPTIONS
946 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
947 64-bit mode of the ARM Architecture (AArch64).
948 @c man end
949 @c man begin INCLUDE
950 @include c-aarch64.texi
951 @c ended inside the included file
952 @end ifset
953
954 @end ifset
955
956 @ifset ALPHA
957
958 @ifclear man
959 @xref{Alpha Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
960 for an Alpha processor.
961 @end ifclear
962
963 @ifset man
964 @c man begin OPTIONS
965 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an Alpha
966 processor.
967 @c man end
968 @c man begin INCLUDE
969 @include c-alpha.texi
970 @c ended inside the included file
971 @end ifset
972
973 @end ifset
974
975 @c man begin OPTIONS
976 @ifset ARC
977 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an ARC
978 processor.
979
980 @table @gcctabopt
981 @item -mcpu=@var{cpu}
982 This option selects the core processor variant.
983 @item -EB | -EL
984 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
985 @item -mcode-density
986 Enable Code Density extenssion instructions.
987 @end table
988 @end ifset
989
990 @ifset ARM
991 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the ARM
992 processor family.
993
994 @table @gcctabopt
995 @item -mcpu=@var{processor}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
996 Specify which ARM processor variant is the target.
997 @item -march=@var{architecture}[+@var{extension}@dots{}]
998 Specify which ARM architecture variant is used by the target.
999 @item -mfpu=@var{floating-point-format}
1000 Select which Floating Point architecture is the target.
1001 @item -mfloat-abi=@var{abi}
1002 Select which floating point ABI is in use.
1003 @item -mthumb
1004 Enable Thumb only instruction decoding.
1005 @item -mapcs-32 | -mapcs-26 | -mapcs-float | -mapcs-reentrant
1006 Select which procedure calling convention is in use.
1007 @item -EB | -EL
1008 Select either big-endian (-EB) or little-endian (-EL) output.
1009 @item -mthumb-interwork
1010 Specify that the code has been generated with interworking between Thumb and
1011 ARM code in mind.
1012 @item -mccs
1013 Turns on CodeComposer Studio assembly syntax compatibility mode.
1014 @item -k
1015 Specify that PIC code has been generated.
1016 @end table
1017 @end ifset
1018 @c man end
1019
1020 @ifset Blackfin
1021
1022 @ifclear man
1023 @xref{Blackfin Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1024 configured for the Blackfin processor family.
1025 @end ifclear
1026
1027 @ifset man
1028 @c man begin OPTIONS
1029 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1030 the Blackfin processor family.
1031 @c man end
1032 @c man begin INCLUDE
1033 @include c-bfin.texi
1034 @c ended inside the included file
1035 @end ifset
1036
1037 @end ifset
1038
1039 @ifset BPF
1040
1041 @ifclear man
1042 @xref{BPF Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1043 configured for the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1044 @end ifclear
1045
1046 @ifset man
1047 @c man begin OPTIONS
1048 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1049 the Linux kernel BPF processor family.
1050 @c man end
1051 @c man begin INCLUDE
1052 @include c-bpf.texi
1053 @c ended inside the included file
1054 @end ifset
1055
1056 @end ifset
1057
1058 @c man begin OPTIONS
1059 @ifset CRIS
1060 See the info pages for documentation of the CRIS-specific options.
1061 @end ifset
1062
1063 @ifset CSKY
1064
1065 @ifclear man
1066 @xref{C-SKY Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1067 configured for the C-SKY processor family.
1068 @end ifclear
1069
1070 @ifset man
1071 @c man begin OPTIONS
1072 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1073 the C-SKY processor family.
1074 @c man end
1075 @c man begin INCLUDE
1076 @include c-csky.texi
1077 @c ended inside the included file
1078 @end ifset
1079
1080 @end ifset
1081
1082 @ifset D10V
1083 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1084 a D10V processor.
1085 @table @gcctabopt
1086 @cindex D10V optimization
1087 @cindex optimization, D10V
1088 @item -O
1089 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1090 @end table
1091 @end ifset
1092
1093 @ifset D30V
1094 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a D30V
1095 processor.
1096 @table @gcctabopt
1097 @cindex D30V optimization
1098 @cindex optimization, D30V
1099 @item -O
1100 Optimize output by parallelizing instructions.
1101
1102 @cindex D30V nops
1103 @item -n
1104 Warn when nops are generated.
1105
1106 @cindex D30V nops after 32-bit multiply
1107 @item -N
1108 Warn when a nop after a 32-bit multiply instruction is generated.
1109 @end table
1110 @end ifset
1111 @c man end
1112
1113 @ifset EPIPHANY
1114 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1115 Adapteva EPIPHANY series.
1116
1117 @ifclear man
1118 @xref{Epiphany Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1119 configured for an Epiphany processor.
1120 @end ifclear
1121
1122 @ifset man
1123 @c man begin OPTIONS
1124 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1125 an Epiphany processor.
1126 @c man end
1127 @c man begin INCLUDE
1128 @include c-epiphany.texi
1129 @c ended inside the included file
1130 @end ifset
1131
1132 @end ifset
1133
1134 @ifset H8300
1135
1136 @ifclear man
1137 @xref{H8/300 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1138 for an H8/300 processor.
1139 @end ifclear
1140
1141 @ifset man
1142 @c man begin OPTIONS
1143 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an H8/300
1144 processor.
1145 @c man end
1146 @c man begin INCLUDE
1147 @include c-h8300.texi
1148 @c ended inside the included file
1149 @end ifset
1150
1151 @end ifset
1152
1153 @ifset I80386
1154
1155 @ifclear man
1156 @xref{i386-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is
1157 configured for an i386 processor.
1158 @end ifclear
1159
1160 @ifset man
1161 @c man begin OPTIONS
1162 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1163 an i386 processor.
1164 @c man end
1165 @c man begin INCLUDE
1166 @include c-i386.texi
1167 @c ended inside the included file
1168 @end ifset
1169
1170 @end ifset
1171
1172 @c man begin OPTIONS
1173 @ifset IP2K
1174 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1175 Ubicom IP2K series.
1176
1177 @table @gcctabopt
1178
1179 @item -mip2022ext
1180 Specifies that the extended IP2022 instructions are allowed.
1181
1182 @item -mip2022
1183 Restores the default behaviour, which restricts the permitted instructions to
1184 just the basic IP2022 ones.
1185
1186 @end table
1187 @end ifset
1188
1189 @ifset M32C
1190 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1191 Renesas M32C and M16C processors.
1192
1193 @table @gcctabopt
1194
1195 @item -m32c
1196 Assemble M32C instructions.
1197
1198 @item -m16c
1199 Assemble M16C instructions (the default).
1200
1201 @item -relax
1202 Enable support for link-time relaxations.
1203
1204 @item -h-tick-hex
1205 Support H'00 style hex constants in addition to 0x00 style.
1206
1207 @end table
1208 @end ifset
1209
1210 @ifset M32R
1211 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1212 Renesas M32R (formerly Mitsubishi M32R) series.
1213
1214 @table @gcctabopt
1215
1216 @item --m32rx
1217 Specify which processor in the M32R family is the target. The default
1218 is normally the M32R, but this option changes it to the M32RX.
1219
1220 @item --warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wp
1221 Produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1222 encountered.
1223
1224 @item --no-warn-explicit-parallel-conflicts or --Wnp
1225 Do not produce warning messages when questionable parallel constructs are
1226 encountered.
1227
1228 @end table
1229 @end ifset
1230
1231 @ifset M680X0
1232 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1233 Motorola 68000 series.
1234
1235 @table @gcctabopt
1236
1237 @item -l
1238 Shorten references to undefined symbols, to one word instead of two.
1239
1240 @item -m68000 | -m68008 | -m68010 | -m68020 | -m68030
1241 @itemx | -m68040 | -m68060 | -m68302 | -m68331 | -m68332
1242 @itemx | -m68333 | -m68340 | -mcpu32 | -m5200
1243 Specify what processor in the 68000 family is the target. The default
1244 is normally the 68020, but this can be changed at configuration time.
1245
1246 @item -m68881 | -m68882 | -mno-68881 | -mno-68882
1247 The target machine does (or does not) have a floating-point coprocessor.
1248 The default is to assume a coprocessor for 68020, 68030, and cpu32. Although
1249 the basic 68000 is not compatible with the 68881, a combination of the
1250 two can be specified, since it's possible to do emulation of the
1251 coprocessor instructions with the main processor.
1252
1253 @item -m68851 | -mno-68851
1254 The target machine does (or does not) have a memory-management
1255 unit coprocessor. The default is to assume an MMU for 68020 and up.
1256
1257 @end table
1258 @end ifset
1259
1260 @ifset NIOSII
1261
1262 @ifclear man
1263 @xref{Nios II Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1264 for an Altera Nios II processor.
1265 @end ifclear
1266
1267 @ifset man
1268 @c man begin OPTIONS
1269 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1270 Altera Nios II processor.
1271 @c man end
1272 @c man begin INCLUDE
1273 @include c-nios2.texi
1274 @c ended inside the included file
1275 @end ifset
1276 @end ifset
1277
1278 @ifset PDP11
1279
1280 For details about the PDP-11 machine dependent features options,
1281 see @ref{PDP-11-Options}.
1282
1283 @table @gcctabopt
1284 @item -mpic | -mno-pic
1285 Generate position-independent (or position-dependent) code. The
1286 default is @option{-mpic}.
1287
1288 @item -mall
1289 @itemx -mall-extensions
1290 Enable all instruction set extensions. This is the default.
1291
1292 @item -mno-extensions
1293 Disable all instruction set extensions.
1294
1295 @item -m@var{extension} | -mno-@var{extension}
1296 Enable (or disable) a particular instruction set extension.
1297
1298 @item -m@var{cpu}
1299 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular CPU, and
1300 disable all other extensions.
1301
1302 @item -m@var{machine}
1303 Enable the instruction set extensions supported by a particular machine
1304 model, and disable all other extensions.
1305 @end table
1306
1307 @end ifset
1308
1309 @ifset PJ
1310 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1311 a picoJava processor.
1312
1313 @table @gcctabopt
1314
1315 @cindex PJ endianness
1316 @cindex endianness, PJ
1317 @cindex big endian output, PJ
1318 @item -mb
1319 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1320
1321 @cindex little endian output, PJ
1322 @item -ml
1323 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1324
1325 @end table
1326 @end ifset
1327
1328 @ifset PRU
1329
1330 @ifclear man
1331 @xref{PRU Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1332 for a PRU processor.
1333 @end ifclear
1334
1335 @ifset man
1336 @c man begin OPTIONS
1337 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1338 PRU processor.
1339 @c man end
1340 @c man begin INCLUDE
1341 @include c-pru.texi
1342 @c ended inside the included file
1343 @end ifset
1344 @end ifset
1345
1346 @ifset M68HC11
1347 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the
1348 Motorola 68HC11 or 68HC12 series.
1349
1350 @table @gcctabopt
1351
1352 @item -m68hc11 | -m68hc12 | -m68hcs12 | -mm9s12x | -mm9s12xg
1353 Specify what processor is the target. The default is
1354 defined by the configuration option when building the assembler.
1355
1356 @item --xgate-ramoffset
1357 Instruct the linker to offset RAM addresses from S12X address space into
1358 XGATE address space.
1359
1360 @item -mshort
1361 Specify to use the 16-bit integer ABI.
1362
1363 @item -mlong
1364 Specify to use the 32-bit integer ABI.
1365
1366 @item -mshort-double
1367 Specify to use the 32-bit double ABI.
1368
1369 @item -mlong-double
1370 Specify to use the 64-bit double ABI.
1371
1372 @item --force-long-branches
1373 Relative branches are turned into absolute ones. This concerns
1374 conditional branches, unconditional branches and branches to a
1375 sub routine.
1376
1377 @item -S | --short-branches
1378 Do not turn relative branches into absolute ones
1379 when the offset is out of range.
1380
1381 @item --strict-direct-mode
1382 Do not turn the direct addressing mode into extended addressing mode
1383 when the instruction does not support direct addressing mode.
1384
1385 @item --print-insn-syntax
1386 Print the syntax of instruction in case of error.
1387
1388 @item --print-opcodes
1389 Print the list of instructions with syntax and then exit.
1390
1391 @item --generate-example
1392 Print an example of instruction for each possible instruction and then exit.
1393 This option is only useful for testing @command{@value{AS}}.
1394
1395 @end table
1396 @end ifset
1397
1398 @ifset SPARC
1399 The following options are available when @command{@value{AS}} is configured
1400 for the SPARC architecture:
1401
1402 @table @gcctabopt
1403 @item -Av6 | -Av7 | -Av8 | -Asparclet | -Asparclite
1404 @itemx -Av8plus | -Av8plusa | -Av9 | -Av9a
1405 Explicitly select a variant of the SPARC architecture.
1406
1407 @samp{-Av8plus} and @samp{-Av8plusa} select a 32 bit environment.
1408 @samp{-Av9} and @samp{-Av9a} select a 64 bit environment.
1409
1410 @samp{-Av8plusa} and @samp{-Av9a} enable the SPARC V9 instruction set with
1411 UltraSPARC extensions.
1412
1413 @item -xarch=v8plus | -xarch=v8plusa
1414 For compatibility with the Solaris v9 assembler. These options are
1415 equivalent to -Av8plus and -Av8plusa, respectively.
1416
1417 @item -bump
1418 Warn when the assembler switches to another architecture.
1419 @end table
1420 @end ifset
1421
1422 @ifset TIC54X
1423 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the 'c54x
1424 architecture.
1425
1426 @table @gcctabopt
1427 @item -mfar-mode
1428 Enable extended addressing mode. All addresses and relocations will assume
1429 extended addressing (usually 23 bits).
1430 @item -mcpu=@var{CPU_VERSION}
1431 Sets the CPU version being compiled for.
1432 @item -merrors-to-file @var{FILENAME}
1433 Redirect error output to a file, for broken systems which don't support such
1434 behaviour in the shell.
1435 @end table
1436 @end ifset
1437
1438 @ifset MIPS
1439 @c man begin OPTIONS
1440 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1441 a MIPS processor.
1442
1443 @table @gcctabopt
1444 @item -G @var{num}
1445 This option sets the largest size of an object that can be referenced
1446 implicitly with the @code{gp} register. It is only accepted for targets that
1447 use ECOFF format, such as a DECstation running Ultrix. The default value is 8.
1448
1449 @cindex MIPS endianness
1450 @cindex endianness, MIPS
1451 @cindex big endian output, MIPS
1452 @item -EB
1453 Generate ``big endian'' format output.
1454
1455 @cindex little endian output, MIPS
1456 @item -EL
1457 Generate ``little endian'' format output.
1458
1459 @cindex MIPS ISA
1460 @item -mips1
1461 @itemx -mips2
1462 @itemx -mips3
1463 @itemx -mips4
1464 @itemx -mips5
1465 @itemx -mips32
1466 @itemx -mips32r2
1467 @itemx -mips32r3
1468 @itemx -mips32r5
1469 @itemx -mips32r6
1470 @itemx -mips64
1471 @itemx -mips64r2
1472 @itemx -mips64r3
1473 @itemx -mips64r5
1474 @itemx -mips64r6
1475 Generate code for a particular MIPS Instruction Set Architecture level.
1476 @samp{-mips1} is an alias for @samp{-march=r3000}, @samp{-mips2} is an
1477 alias for @samp{-march=r6000}, @samp{-mips3} is an alias for
1478 @samp{-march=r4000} and @samp{-mips4} is an alias for @samp{-march=r8000}.
1479 @samp{-mips5}, @samp{-mips32}, @samp{-mips32r2}, @samp{-mips32r3},
1480 @samp{-mips32r5}, @samp{-mips32r6}, @samp{-mips64}, @samp{-mips64r2},
1481 @samp{-mips64r3}, @samp{-mips64r5}, and @samp{-mips64r6} correspond to generic
1482 MIPS V, MIPS32, MIPS32 Release 2, MIPS32 Release 3, MIPS32 Release 5, MIPS32
1483 Release 6, MIPS64, MIPS64 Release 2, MIPS64 Release 3, MIPS64 Release 5, and
1484 MIPS64 Release 6 ISA processors, respectively.
1485
1486 @item -march=@var{cpu}
1487 Generate code for a particular MIPS CPU.
1488
1489 @item -mtune=@var{cpu}
1490 Schedule and tune for a particular MIPS CPU.
1491
1492 @item -mfix7000
1493 @itemx -mno-fix7000
1494 Cause nops to be inserted if the read of the destination register
1495 of an mfhi or mflo instruction occurs in the following two instructions.
1496
1497 @item -mfix-rm7000
1498 @itemx -mno-fix-rm7000
1499 Cause nops to be inserted if a dmult or dmultu instruction is
1500 followed by a load instruction.
1501
1502 @item -mfix-r5900
1503 @itemx -mno-fix-r5900
1504 Do not attempt to schedule the preceding instruction into the delay slot
1505 of a branch instruction placed at the end of a short loop of six
1506 instructions or fewer and always schedule a @code{nop} instruction there
1507 instead. The short loop bug under certain conditions causes loops to
1508 execute only once or twice, due to a hardware bug in the R5900 chip.
1509
1510 @item -mdebug
1511 @itemx -no-mdebug
1512 Cause stabs-style debugging output to go into an ECOFF-style .mdebug
1513 section instead of the standard ELF .stabs sections.
1514
1515 @item -mpdr
1516 @itemx -mno-pdr
1517 Control generation of @code{.pdr} sections.
1518
1519 @item -mgp32
1520 @itemx -mfp32
1521 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1522 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 32 bits wide at
1523 all times. @samp{-mgp32} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1524 and @samp{-mfp32} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1525
1526 @item -mgp64
1527 @itemx -mfp64
1528 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but these
1529 flags force a certain group of registers to be treated as 64 bits wide at
1530 all times. @samp{-mgp64} controls the size of general-purpose registers
1531 and @samp{-mfp64} controls the size of floating-point registers.
1532
1533 @item -mfpxx
1534 The register sizes are normally inferred from the ISA and ABI, but using
1535 this flag in combination with @samp{-mabi=32} enables an ABI variant
1536 which will operate correctly with floating-point registers which are
1537 32 or 64 bits wide.
1538
1539 @item -modd-spreg
1540 @itemx -mno-odd-spreg
1541 Enable use of floating-point operations on odd-numbered single-precision
1542 registers when supported by the ISA. @samp{-mfpxx} implies
1543 @samp{-mno-odd-spreg}, otherwise the default is @samp{-modd-spreg}.
1544
1545 @item -mips16
1546 @itemx -no-mips16
1547 Generate code for the MIPS 16 processor. This is equivalent to putting
1548 @code{.module mips16} at the start of the assembly file. @samp{-no-mips16}
1549 turns off this option.
1550
1551 @item -mmips16e2
1552 @itemx -mno-mips16e2
1553 Enable the use of MIPS16e2 instructions in MIPS16 mode. This is equivalent
1554 to putting @code{.module mips16e2} at the start of the assembly file.
1555 @samp{-mno-mips16e2} turns off this option.
1556
1557 @item -mmicromips
1558 @itemx -mno-micromips
1559 Generate code for the microMIPS processor. This is equivalent to putting
1560 @code{.module micromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1561 @samp{-mno-micromips} turns off this option. This is equivalent to putting
1562 @code{.module nomicromips} at the start of the assembly file.
1563
1564 @item -msmartmips
1565 @itemx -mno-smartmips
1566 Enables the SmartMIPS extension to the MIPS32 instruction set. This is
1567 equivalent to putting @code{.module smartmips} at the start of the assembly
1568 file. @samp{-mno-smartmips} turns off this option.
1569
1570 @item -mips3d
1571 @itemx -no-mips3d
1572 Generate code for the MIPS-3D Application Specific Extension.
1573 This tells the assembler to accept MIPS-3D instructions.
1574 @samp{-no-mips3d} turns off this option.
1575
1576 @item -mdmx
1577 @itemx -no-mdmx
1578 Generate code for the MDMX Application Specific Extension.
1579 This tells the assembler to accept MDMX instructions.
1580 @samp{-no-mdmx} turns off this option.
1581
1582 @item -mdsp
1583 @itemx -mno-dsp
1584 Generate code for the DSP Release 1 Application Specific Extension.
1585 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 1 instructions.
1586 @samp{-mno-dsp} turns off this option.
1587
1588 @item -mdspr2
1589 @itemx -mno-dspr2
1590 Generate code for the DSP Release 2 Application Specific Extension.
1591 This option implies @samp{-mdsp}.
1592 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 2 instructions.
1593 @samp{-mno-dspr2} turns off this option.
1594
1595 @item -mdspr3
1596 @itemx -mno-dspr3
1597 Generate code for the DSP Release 3 Application Specific Extension.
1598 This option implies @samp{-mdsp} and @samp{-mdspr2}.
1599 This tells the assembler to accept DSP Release 3 instructions.
1600 @samp{-mno-dspr3} turns off this option.
1601
1602 @item -mmsa
1603 @itemx -mno-msa
1604 Generate code for the MIPS SIMD Architecture Extension.
1605 This tells the assembler to accept MSA instructions.
1606 @samp{-mno-msa} turns off this option.
1607
1608 @item -mxpa
1609 @itemx -mno-xpa
1610 Generate code for the MIPS eXtended Physical Address (XPA) Extension.
1611 This tells the assembler to accept XPA instructions.
1612 @samp{-mno-xpa} turns off this option.
1613
1614 @item -mmt
1615 @itemx -mno-mt
1616 Generate code for the MT Application Specific Extension.
1617 This tells the assembler to accept MT instructions.
1618 @samp{-mno-mt} turns off this option.
1619
1620 @item -mmcu
1621 @itemx -mno-mcu
1622 Generate code for the MCU Application Specific Extension.
1623 This tells the assembler to accept MCU instructions.
1624 @samp{-mno-mcu} turns off this option.
1625
1626 @item -mcrc
1627 @itemx -mno-crc
1628 Generate code for the MIPS cyclic redundancy check (CRC) Application
1629 Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept CRC instructions.
1630 @samp{-mno-crc} turns off this option.
1631
1632 @item -mginv
1633 @itemx -mno-ginv
1634 Generate code for the Global INValidate (GINV) Application Specific
1635 Extension. This tells the assembler to accept GINV instructions.
1636 @samp{-mno-ginv} turns off this option.
1637
1638 @item -mloongson-mmi
1639 @itemx -mno-loongson-mmi
1640 Generate code for the Loongson MultiMedia extensions Instructions (MMI)
1641 Application Specific Extension. This tells the assembler to accept MMI
1642 instructions.
1643 @samp{-mno-loongson-mmi} turns off this option.
1644
1645 @item -mloongson-cam
1646 @itemx -mno-loongson-cam
1647 Generate code for the Loongson Content Address Memory (CAM) instructions.
1648 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson CAM instructions.
1649 @samp{-mno-loongson-cam} turns off this option.
1650
1651 @item -mloongson-ext
1652 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext
1653 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions (EXT) instructions.
1654 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT instructions.
1655 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext} turns off this option.
1656
1657 @item -mloongson-ext2
1658 @itemx -mno-loongson-ext2
1659 Generate code for the Loongson EXTensions R2 (EXT2) instructions.
1660 This option implies @samp{-mloongson-ext}.
1661 This tells the assembler to accept Loongson EXT2 instructions.
1662 @samp{-mno-loongson-ext2} turns off this option.
1663
1664 @item -minsn32
1665 @itemx -mno-insn32
1666 Only use 32-bit instruction encodings when generating code for the
1667 microMIPS processor. This option inhibits the use of any 16-bit
1668 instructions. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set insn32} at
1669 the start of the assembly file. @samp{-mno-insn32} turns off this
1670 option. This is equivalent to putting @code{.set noinsn32} at the
1671 start of the assembly file. By default @samp{-mno-insn32} is
1672 selected, allowing all instructions to be used.
1673
1674 @item --construct-floats
1675 @itemx --no-construct-floats
1676 The @samp{--no-construct-floats} option disables the construction of
1677 double width floating point constants by loading the two halves of the
1678 value into the two single width floating point registers that make up
1679 the double width register. By default @samp{--construct-floats} is
1680 selected, allowing construction of these floating point constants.
1681
1682 @item --relax-branch
1683 @itemx --no-relax-branch
1684 The @samp{--relax-branch} option enables the relaxation of out-of-range
1685 branches. By default @samp{--no-relax-branch} is selected, causing any
1686 out-of-range branches to produce an error.
1687
1688 @item -mignore-branch-isa
1689 @itemx -mno-ignore-branch-isa
1690 Ignore branch checks for invalid transitions between ISA modes. The
1691 semantics of branches does not provide for an ISA mode switch, so in
1692 most cases the ISA mode a branch has been encoded for has to be the
1693 same as the ISA mode of the branch's target label. Therefore GAS has
1694 checks implemented that verify in branch assembly that the two ISA
1695 modes match. @samp{-mignore-branch-isa} disables these checks. By
1696 default @samp{-mno-ignore-branch-isa} is selected, causing any invalid
1697 branch requiring a transition between ISA modes to produce an error.
1698
1699 @item -mnan=@var{encoding}
1700 Select between the IEEE 754-2008 (@option{-mnan=2008}) or the legacy
1701 (@option{-mnan=legacy}) NaN encoding format. The latter is the default.
1702
1703 @cindex emulation
1704 @item --emulation=@var{name}
1705 This option was formerly used to switch between ELF and ECOFF output
1706 on targets like IRIX 5 that supported both. MIPS ECOFF support was
1707 removed in GAS 2.24, so the option now serves little purpose.
1708 It is retained for backwards compatibility.
1709
1710 The available configuration names are: @samp{mipself}, @samp{mipslelf} and
1711 @samp{mipsbelf}. Choosing @samp{mipself} now has no effect, since the output
1712 is always ELF. @samp{mipslelf} and @samp{mipsbelf} select little- and
1713 big-endian output respectively, but @samp{-EL} and @samp{-EB} are now the
1714 preferred options instead.
1715
1716 @item -nocpp
1717 @command{@value{AS}} ignores this option. It is accepted for compatibility with
1718 the native tools.
1719
1720 @item --trap
1721 @itemx --no-trap
1722 @itemx --break
1723 @itemx --no-break
1724 Control how to deal with multiplication overflow and division by zero.
1725 @samp{--trap} or @samp{--no-break} (which are synonyms) take a trap exception
1726 (and only work for Instruction Set Architecture level 2 and higher);
1727 @samp{--break} or @samp{--no-trap} (also synonyms, and the default) take a
1728 break exception.
1729
1730 @item -n
1731 When this option is used, @command{@value{AS}} will issue a warning every
1732 time it generates a nop instruction from a macro.
1733 @end table
1734 @c man end
1735 @end ifset
1736
1737 @ifset MCORE
1738 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for
1739 an MCore processor.
1740
1741 @table @gcctabopt
1742 @item -jsri2bsr
1743 @itemx -nojsri2bsr
1744 Enable or disable the JSRI to BSR transformation. By default this is enabled.
1745 The command-line option @samp{-nojsri2bsr} can be used to disable it.
1746
1747 @item -sifilter
1748 @itemx -nosifilter
1749 Enable or disable the silicon filter behaviour. By default this is disabled.
1750 The default can be overridden by the @samp{-sifilter} command-line option.
1751
1752 @item -relax
1753 Alter jump instructions for long displacements.
1754
1755 @item -mcpu=[210|340]
1756 Select the cpu type on the target hardware. This controls which instructions
1757 can be assembled.
1758
1759 @item -EB
1760 Assemble for a big endian target.
1761
1762 @item -EL
1763 Assemble for a little endian target.
1764
1765 @end table
1766 @end ifset
1767 @c man end
1768
1769 @ifset METAG
1770
1771 @ifclear man
1772 @xref{Meta Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1773 for a Meta processor.
1774 @end ifclear
1775
1776 @ifset man
1777 @c man begin OPTIONS
1778 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1779 Meta processor.
1780 @c man end
1781 @c man begin INCLUDE
1782 @include c-metag.texi
1783 @c ended inside the included file
1784 @end ifset
1785
1786 @end ifset
1787
1788 @c man begin OPTIONS
1789 @ifset MMIX
1790 See the info pages for documentation of the MMIX-specific options.
1791 @end ifset
1792
1793 @ifset NDS32
1794
1795 @ifclear man
1796 @xref{NDS32 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1797 for a NDS32 processor.
1798 @end ifclear
1799 @c ended inside the included file
1800 @end ifset
1801
1802 @ifset man
1803 @c man begin OPTIONS
1804 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1805 NDS32 processor.
1806 @c man end
1807 @c man begin INCLUDE
1808 @include c-nds32.texi
1809 @c ended inside the included file
1810 @end ifset
1811
1812 @c man end
1813 @ifset PPC
1814
1815 @ifclear man
1816 @xref{PowerPC-Opts}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1817 for a PowerPC processor.
1818 @end ifclear
1819
1820 @ifset man
1821 @c man begin OPTIONS
1822 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1823 PowerPC processor.
1824 @c man end
1825 @c man begin INCLUDE
1826 @include c-ppc.texi
1827 @c ended inside the included file
1828 @end ifset
1829
1830 @end ifset
1831
1832 @ifset RISCV
1833
1834 @ifclear man
1835 @xref{RISC-V-Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1836 for a RISC-V processor.
1837 @end ifclear
1838
1839 @ifset man
1840 @c man begin OPTIONS
1841 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1842 RISC-V processor.
1843 @c man end
1844 @c man begin INCLUDE
1845 @include c-riscv.texi
1846 @c ended inside the included file
1847 @end ifset
1848
1849 @end ifset
1850
1851 @c man begin OPTIONS
1852 @ifset RX
1853 See the info pages for documentation of the RX-specific options.
1854 @end ifset
1855
1856 @ifset S390
1857 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for the s390
1858 processor family.
1859
1860 @table @gcctabopt
1861 @item -m31
1862 @itemx -m64
1863 Select the word size, either 31/32 bits or 64 bits.
1864 @item -mesa
1865 @item -mzarch
1866 Select the architecture mode, either the Enterprise System
1867 Architecture (esa) or the z/Architecture mode (zarch).
1868 @item -march=@var{processor}
1869 Specify which s390 processor variant is the target, @samp{g5} (or
1870 @samp{arch3}), @samp{g6}, @samp{z900} (or @samp{arch5}), @samp{z990} (or
1871 @samp{arch6}), @samp{z9-109}, @samp{z9-ec} (or @samp{arch7}), @samp{z10} (or
1872 @samp{arch8}), @samp{z196} (or @samp{arch9}), @samp{zEC12} (or @samp{arch10}),
1873 @samp{z13} (or @samp{arch11}), @samp{z14} (or @samp{arch12}), or @samp{z15}
1874 (or @samp{arch13}).
1875 @item -mregnames
1876 @itemx -mno-regnames
1877 Allow or disallow symbolic names for registers.
1878 @item -mwarn-areg-zero
1879 Warn whenever the operand for a base or index register has been specified
1880 but evaluates to zero.
1881 @end table
1882 @end ifset
1883 @c man end
1884
1885 @ifset TIC6X
1886
1887 @ifclear man
1888 @xref{TIC6X Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1889 for a TMS320C6000 processor.
1890 @end ifclear
1891
1892 @ifset man
1893 @c man begin OPTIONS
1894 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a
1895 TMS320C6000 processor.
1896 @c man end
1897 @c man begin INCLUDE
1898 @include c-tic6x.texi
1899 @c ended inside the included file
1900 @end ifset
1901
1902 @end ifset
1903
1904 @ifset TILEGX
1905
1906 @ifclear man
1907 @xref{TILE-Gx Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1908 for a TILE-Gx processor.
1909 @end ifclear
1910
1911 @ifset man
1912 @c man begin OPTIONS
1913 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for a TILE-Gx
1914 processor.
1915 @c man end
1916 @c man begin INCLUDE
1917 @include c-tilegx.texi
1918 @c ended inside the included file
1919 @end ifset
1920
1921 @end ifset
1922
1923 @ifset VISIUM
1924
1925 @ifclear man
1926 @xref{Visium Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1927 for a Visium processor.
1928 @end ifclear
1929
1930 @ifset man
1931 @c man begin OPTIONS
1932 The following option is available when @value{AS} is configured for a Visium
1933 processor.
1934 @c man end
1935 @c man begin INCLUDE
1936 @include c-visium.texi
1937 @c ended inside the included file
1938 @end ifset
1939
1940 @end ifset
1941
1942 @ifset XTENSA
1943
1944 @ifclear man
1945 @xref{Xtensa Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1946 for an Xtensa processor.
1947 @end ifclear
1948
1949 @ifset man
1950 @c man begin OPTIONS
1951 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1952 Xtensa processor.
1953 @c man end
1954 @c man begin INCLUDE
1955 @include c-xtensa.texi
1956 @c ended inside the included file
1957 @end ifset
1958
1959 @end ifset
1960
1961 @ifset Z80
1962
1963 @ifclear man
1964 @xref{Z80 Options}, for the options available when @value{AS} is configured
1965 for an Z80 processor.
1966 @end ifclear
1967
1968 @ifset man
1969 @c man begin OPTIONS
1970 The following options are available when @value{AS} is configured for an
1971 Z80 processor.
1972 @c man end
1973 @c man begin INCLUDE
1974 @include c-z80.texi
1975 @c ended inside the included file
1976 @end ifset
1977
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 @menu
1981 * Manual:: Structure of this Manual
1982 * GNU Assembler:: The GNU Assembler
1983 * Object Formats:: Object File Formats
1984 * Command Line:: Command Line
1985 * Input Files:: Input Files
1986 * Object:: Output (Object) File
1987 * Errors:: Error and Warning Messages
1988 @end menu
1989
1990 @node Manual
1991 @section Structure of this Manual
1992
1993 @cindex manual, structure and purpose
1994 This manual is intended to describe what you need to know to use
1995 @sc{gnu} @command{@value{AS}}. We cover the syntax expected in source files, including
1996 notation for symbols, constants, and expressions; the directives that
1997 @command{@value{AS}} understands; and of course how to invoke @command{@value{AS}}.
1998
1999 @ifclear GENERIC
2000 We also cover special features in the @value{TARGET}
2001 configuration of @command{@value{AS}}, including assembler directives.
2002 @end ifclear
2003 @ifset GENERIC
2004 This manual also describes some of the machine-dependent features of
2005 various flavors of the assembler.
2006 @end ifset
2007
2008 @cindex machine instructions (not covered)
2009 On the other hand, this manual is @emph{not} intended as an introduction
2010 to programming in assembly language---let alone programming in general!
2011 In a similar vein, we make no attempt to introduce the machine
2012 architecture; we do @emph{not} describe the instruction set, standard
2013 mnemonics, registers or addressing modes that are standard to a
2014 particular architecture.
2015 @ifset GENERIC
2016 You may want to consult the manufacturer's
2017 machine architecture manual for this information.
2018 @end ifset
2019 @ifclear GENERIC
2020 @ifset H8/300
2021 For information on the H8/300 machine instruction set, see @cite{H8/300
2022 Series Programming Manual}. For the H8/300H, see @cite{H8/300H Series
2023 Programming Manual} (Renesas).
2024 @end ifset
2025 @ifset SH
2026 For information on the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) / SuperH SH machine instruction set,
2027 see @cite{SH-Microcomputer User's Manual} (Renesas) or
2028 @cite{SH-4 32-bit CPU Core Architecture} (SuperH) and
2029 @cite{SuperH (SH) 64-Bit RISC Series} (SuperH).
2030 @end ifset
2031 @ifset Z8000
2032 For information on the Z8000 machine instruction set, see @cite{Z8000 CPU Technical Manual}
2033 @end ifset
2034 @end ifclear
2035
2036 @c I think this is premature---doc@cygnus.com, 17jan1991
2037 @ignore
2038 Throughout this manual, we assume that you are running @dfn{GNU},
2039 the portable operating system from the @dfn{Free Software
2040 Foundation, Inc.}. This restricts our attention to certain kinds of
2041 computer (in particular, the kinds of computers that @sc{gnu} can run on);
2042 once this assumption is granted examples and definitions need less
2043 qualification.
2044
2045 @command{@value{AS}} is part of a team of programs that turn a high-level
2046 human-readable series of instructions into a low-level
2047 computer-readable series of instructions. Different versions of
2048 @command{@value{AS}} are used for different kinds of computer.
2049 @end ignore
2050
2051 @c There used to be a section "Terminology" here, which defined
2052 @c "contents", "byte", "word", and "long". Defining "word" to any
2053 @c particular size is confusing when the .word directive may generate 16
2054 @c bits on one machine and 32 bits on another; in general, for the user
2055 @c version of this manual, none of these terms seem essential to define.
2056 @c They were used very little even in the former draft of the manual;
2057 @c this draft makes an effort to avoid them (except in names of
2058 @c directives).
2059
2060 @node GNU Assembler
2061 @section The GNU Assembler
2062
2063 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2064
2065 @sc{gnu} @command{as} is really a family of assemblers.
2066 @ifclear GENERIC
2067 This manual describes @command{@value{AS}}, a member of that family which is
2068 configured for the @value{TARGET} architectures.
2069 @end ifclear
2070 If you use (or have used) the @sc{gnu} assembler on one architecture, you
2071 should find a fairly similar environment when you use it on another
2072 architecture. Each version has much in common with the others,
2073 including object file formats, most assembler directives (often called
2074 @dfn{pseudo-ops}) and assembler syntax.@refill
2075
2076 @cindex purpose of @sc{gnu} assembler
2077 @command{@value{AS}} is primarily intended to assemble the output of the
2078 @sc{gnu} C compiler @code{@value{GCC}} for use by the linker
2079 @code{@value{LD}}. Nevertheless, we've tried to make @command{@value{AS}}
2080 assemble correctly everything that other assemblers for the same
2081 machine would assemble.
2082 @ifset VAX
2083 Any exceptions are documented explicitly (@pxref{Machine Dependencies}).
2084 @end ifset
2085 @ifset M680X0
2086 @c This remark should appear in generic version of manual; assumption
2087 @c here is that generic version sets M680x0.
2088 This doesn't mean @command{@value{AS}} always uses the same syntax as another
2089 assembler for the same architecture; for example, we know of several
2090 incompatible versions of 680x0 assembly language syntax.
2091 @end ifset
2092
2093 @c man end
2094
2095 Unlike older assemblers, @command{@value{AS}} is designed to assemble a source
2096 program in one pass of the source file. This has a subtle impact on the
2097 @kbd{.org} directive (@pxref{Org,,@code{.org}}).
2098
2099 @node Object Formats
2100 @section Object File Formats
2101
2102 @cindex object file format
2103 The @sc{gnu} assembler can be configured to produce several alternative
2104 object file formats. For the most part, this does not affect how you
2105 write assembly language programs; but directives for debugging symbols
2106 are typically different in different file formats. @xref{Symbol
2107 Attributes,,Symbol Attributes}.
2108 @ifclear GENERIC
2109 @ifclear MULTI-OBJ
2110 For the @value{TARGET} target, @command{@value{AS}} is configured to produce
2111 @value{OBJ-NAME} format object files.
2112 @end ifclear
2113 @c The following should exhaust all configs that set MULTI-OBJ, ideally
2114 @ifset HPPA
2115 On the @value{TARGET}, @command{@value{AS}} can be configured to produce either
2116 SOM or ELF format object files.
2117 @end ifset
2118 @end ifclear
2119
2120 @node Command Line
2121 @section Command Line
2122
2123 @cindex command line conventions
2124
2125 After the program name @command{@value{AS}}, the command line may contain
2126 options and file names. Options may appear in any order, and may be
2127 before, after, or between file names. The order of file names is
2128 significant.
2129
2130 @cindex standard input, as input file
2131 @kindex --
2132 @file{--} (two hyphens) by itself names the standard input file
2133 explicitly, as one of the files for @command{@value{AS}} to assemble.
2134
2135 @cindex options, command line
2136 Except for @samp{--} any command-line argument that begins with a
2137 hyphen (@samp{-}) is an option. Each option changes the behavior of
2138 @command{@value{AS}}. No option changes the way another option works. An
2139 option is a @samp{-} followed by one or more letters; the case of
2140 the letter is important. All options are optional.
2141
2142 Some options expect exactly one file name to follow them. The file
2143 name may either immediately follow the option's letter (compatible
2144 with older assemblers) or it may be the next command argument (@sc{gnu}
2145 standard). These two command lines are equivalent:
2146
2147 @smallexample
2148 @value{AS} -o my-object-file.o mumble.s
2149 @value{AS} -omy-object-file.o mumble.s
2150 @end smallexample
2151
2152 @node Input Files
2153 @section Input Files
2154
2155 @cindex input
2156 @cindex source program
2157 @cindex files, input
2158 We use the phrase @dfn{source program}, abbreviated @dfn{source}, to
2159 describe the program input to one run of @command{@value{AS}}. The program may
2160 be in one or more files; how the source is partitioned into files
2161 doesn't change the meaning of the source.
2162
2163 @c I added "con" prefix to "catenation" just to prove I can overcome my
2164 @c APL training... doc@cygnus.com
2165 The source program is a concatenation of the text in all the files, in the
2166 order specified.
2167
2168 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2169 Each time you run @command{@value{AS}} it assembles exactly one source
2170 program. The source program is made up of one or more files.
2171 (The standard input is also a file.)
2172
2173 You give @command{@value{AS}} a command line that has zero or more input file
2174 names. The input files are read (from left file name to right). A
2175 command-line argument (in any position) that has no special meaning
2176 is taken to be an input file name.
2177
2178 If you give @command{@value{AS}} no file names it attempts to read one input file
2179 from the @command{@value{AS}} standard input, which is normally your terminal. You
2180 may have to type @key{ctl-D} to tell @command{@value{AS}} there is no more program
2181 to assemble.
2182
2183 Use @samp{--} if you need to explicitly name the standard input file
2184 in your command line.
2185
2186 If the source is empty, @command{@value{AS}} produces a small, empty object
2187 file.
2188
2189 @c man end
2190
2191 @subheading Filenames and Line-numbers
2192
2193 @cindex input file linenumbers
2194 @cindex line numbers, in input files
2195 There are two ways of locating a line in the input file (or files) and
2196 either may be used in reporting error messages. One way refers to a line
2197 number in a physical file; the other refers to a line number in a
2198 ``logical'' file. @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
2199
2200 @dfn{Physical files} are those files named in the command line given
2201 to @command{@value{AS}}.
2202
2203 @dfn{Logical files} are simply names declared explicitly by assembler
2204 directives; they bear no relation to physical files. Logical file names help
2205 error messages reflect the original source file, when @command{@value{AS}} source
2206 is itself synthesized from other files. @command{@value{AS}} understands the
2207 @samp{#} directives emitted by the @code{@value{GCC}} preprocessor. See also
2208 @ref{File,,@code{.file}}.
2209
2210 @node Object
2211 @section Output (Object) File
2212
2213 @cindex object file
2214 @cindex output file
2215 @kindex a.out
2216 @kindex .o
2217 Every time you run @command{@value{AS}} it produces an output file, which is
2218 your assembly language program translated into numbers. This file
2219 is the object file. Its default name is @code{a.out}.
2220 You can give it another name by using the @option{-o} option. Conventionally,
2221 object file names end with @file{.o}. The default name is used for historical
2222 reasons: older assemblers were capable of assembling self-contained programs
2223 directly into a runnable program. (For some formats, this isn't currently
2224 possible, but it can be done for the @code{a.out} format.)
2225
2226 @cindex linker
2227 @kindex ld
2228 The object file is meant for input to the linker @code{@value{LD}}. It contains
2229 assembled program code, information to help @code{@value{LD}} integrate
2230 the assembled program into a runnable file, and (optionally) symbolic
2231 information for the debugger.
2232
2233 @c link above to some info file(s) like the description of a.out.
2234 @c don't forget to describe @sc{gnu} info as well as Unix lossage.
2235
2236 @node Errors
2237 @section Error and Warning Messages
2238
2239 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2240
2241 @cindex error messages
2242 @cindex warning messages
2243 @cindex messages from assembler
2244 @command{@value{AS}} may write warnings and error messages to the standard error
2245 file (usually your terminal). This should not happen when a compiler
2246 runs @command{@value{AS}} automatically. Warnings report an assumption made so
2247 that @command{@value{AS}} could keep assembling a flawed program; errors report a
2248 grave problem that stops the assembly.
2249
2250 @c man end
2251
2252 @cindex format of warning messages
2253 Warning messages have the format
2254
2255 @smallexample
2256 file_name:@b{NNN}:Warning Message Text
2257 @end smallexample
2258
2259 @noindent
2260 @cindex file names and line numbers, in warnings/errors
2261 (where @b{NNN} is a line number). If both a logical file name
2262 (@pxref{File,,@code{.file}}) and a logical line number
2263 @ifset GENERIC
2264 (@pxref{Line,,@code{.line}})
2265 @end ifset
2266 have been given then they will be used, otherwise the file name and line number
2267 in the current assembler source file will be used. The message text is
2268 intended to be self explanatory (in the grand Unix tradition).
2269
2270 Note the file name must be set via the logical version of the @code{.file}
2271 directive, not the DWARF2 version of the @code{.file} directive. For example:
2272
2273 @smallexample
2274 .file 2 "bar.c"
2275 error_assembler_source
2276 .file "foo.c"
2277 .line 30
2278 error_c_source
2279 @end smallexample
2280
2281 produces this output:
2282
2283 @smallexample
2284 Assembler messages:
2285 asm.s:2: Error: no such instruction: `error_assembler_source'
2286 foo.c:31: Error: no such instruction: `error_c_source'
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @cindex format of error messages
2290 Error messages have the format
2291
2292 @smallexample
2293 file_name:@b{NNN}:FATAL:Error Message Text
2294 @end smallexample
2295
2296 The file name and line number are derived as for warning
2297 messages. The actual message text may be rather less explanatory
2298 because many of them aren't supposed to happen.
2299
2300 @node Invoking
2301 @chapter Command-Line Options
2302
2303 @cindex options, all versions of assembler
2304 This chapter describes command-line options available in @emph{all}
2305 versions of the @sc{gnu} assembler; see @ref{Machine Dependencies},
2306 for options specific
2307 @ifclear GENERIC
2308 to the @value{TARGET} target.
2309 @end ifclear
2310 @ifset GENERIC
2311 to particular machine architectures.
2312 @end ifset
2313
2314 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
2315
2316 If you are invoking @command{@value{AS}} via the @sc{gnu} C compiler,
2317 you can use the @samp{-Wa} option to pass arguments through to the assembler.
2318 The assembler arguments must be separated from each other (and the @samp{-Wa})
2319 by commas. For example:
2320
2321 @smallexample
2322 gcc -c -g -O -Wa,-alh,-L file.c
2323 @end smallexample
2324
2325 @noindent
2326 This passes two options to the assembler: @samp{-alh} (emit a listing to
2327 standard output with high-level and assembly source) and @samp{-L} (retain
2328 local symbols in the symbol table).
2329
2330 Usually you do not need to use this @samp{-Wa} mechanism, since many compiler
2331 command-line options are automatically passed to the assembler by the compiler.
2332 (You can call the @sc{gnu} compiler driver with the @samp{-v} option to see
2333 precisely what options it passes to each compilation pass, including the
2334 assembler.)
2335
2336 @c man end
2337
2338 @menu
2339 * a:: -a[cdghlns] enable listings
2340 * alternate:: --alternate enable alternate macro syntax
2341 * D:: -D for compatibility
2342 * f:: -f to work faster
2343 * I:: -I for .include search path
2344 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2345 * K:: -K for compatibility
2346 @end ifclear
2347 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2348 * K:: -K for difference tables
2349 @end ifset
2350
2351 * L:: -L to retain local symbols
2352 * listing:: --listing-XXX to configure listing output
2353 * M:: -M or --mri to assemble in MRI compatibility mode
2354 * MD:: --MD for dependency tracking
2355 * no-pad-sections:: --no-pad-sections to stop section padding
2356 * o:: -o to name the object file
2357 * R:: -R to join data and text sections
2358 * statistics:: --statistics to see statistics about assembly
2359 * traditional-format:: --traditional-format for compatible output
2360 * v:: -v to announce version
2361 * W:: -W, --no-warn, --warn, --fatal-warnings to control warnings
2362 * Z:: -Z to make object file even after errors
2363 @end menu
2364
2365 @node a
2366 @section Enable Listings: @option{-a[cdghlns]}
2367
2368 @kindex -a
2369 @kindex -ac
2370 @kindex -ad
2371 @kindex -ag
2372 @kindex -ah
2373 @kindex -al
2374 @kindex -an
2375 @kindex -as
2376 @cindex listings, enabling
2377 @cindex assembly listings, enabling
2378
2379 These options enable listing output from the assembler. By itself,
2380 @samp{-a} requests high-level, assembly, and symbols listing.
2381 You can use other letters to select specific options for the list:
2382 @samp{-ah} requests a high-level language listing,
2383 @samp{-al} requests an output-program assembly listing, and
2384 @samp{-as} requests a symbol table listing.
2385 High-level listings require that a compiler debugging option like
2386 @samp{-g} be used, and that assembly listings (@samp{-al}) be requested
2387 also.
2388
2389 Use the @samp{-ag} option to print a first section with general assembly
2390 information, like @value{AS} version, switches passed, or time stamp.
2391
2392 Use the @samp{-ac} option to omit false conditionals from a listing. Any lines
2393 which are not assembled because of a false @code{.if} (or @code{.ifdef}, or any
2394 other conditional), or a true @code{.if} followed by an @code{.else}, will be
2395 omitted from the listing.
2396
2397 Use the @samp{-ad} option to omit debugging directives from the
2398 listing.
2399
2400 Once you have specified one of these options, you can further control
2401 listing output and its appearance using the directives @code{.list},
2402 @code{.nolist}, @code{.psize}, @code{.eject}, @code{.title}, and
2403 @code{.sbttl}.
2404 The @samp{-an} option turns off all forms processing.
2405 If you do not request listing output with one of the @samp{-a} options, the
2406 listing-control directives have no effect.
2407
2408 The letters after @samp{-a} may be combined into one option,
2409 @emph{e.g.}, @samp{-aln}.
2410
2411 Note if the assembler source is coming from the standard input (e.g.,
2412 because it
2413 is being created by @code{@value{GCC}} and the @samp{-pipe} command-line switch
2414 is being used) then the listing will not contain any comments or preprocessor
2415 directives. This is because the listing code buffers input source lines from
2416 stdin only after they have been preprocessed by the assembler. This reduces
2417 memory usage and makes the code more efficient.
2418
2419 @node alternate
2420 @section @option{--alternate}
2421
2422 @kindex --alternate
2423 Begin in alternate macro mode, see @ref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
2424
2425 @node D
2426 @section @option{-D}
2427
2428 @kindex -D
2429 This option has no effect whatsoever, but it is accepted to make it more
2430 likely that scripts written for other assemblers also work with
2431 @command{@value{AS}}.
2432
2433 @node f
2434 @section Work Faster: @option{-f}
2435
2436 @kindex -f
2437 @cindex trusted compiler
2438 @cindex faster processing (@option{-f})
2439 @samp{-f} should only be used when assembling programs written by a
2440 (trusted) compiler. @samp{-f} stops the assembler from doing whitespace
2441 and comment preprocessing on
2442 the input file(s) before assembling them. @xref{Preprocessing,
2443 ,Preprocessing}.
2444
2445 @quotation
2446 @emph{Warning:} if you use @samp{-f} when the files actually need to be
2447 preprocessed (if they contain comments, for example), @command{@value{AS}} does
2448 not work correctly.
2449 @end quotation
2450
2451 @node I
2452 @section @code{.include} Search Path: @option{-I} @var{path}
2453
2454 @kindex -I @var{path}
2455 @cindex paths for @code{.include}
2456 @cindex search path for @code{.include}
2457 @cindex @code{include} directive search path
2458 Use this option to add a @var{path} to the list of directories
2459 @command{@value{AS}} searches for files specified in @code{.include}
2460 directives (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You may use @option{-I} as
2461 many times as necessary to include a variety of paths. The current
2462 working directory is always searched first; after that, @command{@value{AS}}
2463 searches any @samp{-I} directories in the same order as they were
2464 specified (left to right) on the command line.
2465
2466 @node K
2467 @section Difference Tables: @option{-K}
2468
2469 @kindex -K
2470 @ifclear DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2471 On the @value{TARGET} family, this option is allowed, but has no effect. It is
2472 permitted for compatibility with the @sc{gnu} assembler on other platforms,
2473 where it can be used to warn when the assembler alters the machine code
2474 generated for @samp{.word} directives in difference tables. The @value{TARGET}
2475 family does not have the addressing limitations that sometimes lead to this
2476 alteration on other platforms.
2477 @end ifclear
2478
2479 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
2480 @cindex difference tables, warning
2481 @cindex warning for altered difference tables
2482 @command{@value{AS}} sometimes alters the code emitted for directives of the
2483 form @samp{.word @var{sym1}-@var{sym2}}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
2484 You can use the @samp{-K} option if you want a warning issued when this
2485 is done.
2486 @end ifset
2487
2488 @node L
2489 @section Include Local Symbols: @option{-L}
2490
2491 @kindex -L
2492 @cindex local symbols, retaining in output
2493 Symbols beginning with system-specific local label prefixes, typically
2494 @samp{.L} for ELF systems or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, are
2495 called @dfn{local symbols}. @xref{Symbol Names}. Normally you do not see
2496 such symbols when debugging, because they are intended for the use of
2497 programs (like compilers) that compose assembler programs, not for your
2498 notice. Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} discard
2499 such symbols, so you do not normally debug with them.
2500
2501 This option tells @command{@value{AS}} to retain those local symbols
2502 in the object file. Usually if you do this you also tell the linker
2503 @code{@value{LD}} to preserve those symbols.
2504
2505 @node listing
2506 @section Configuring listing output: @option{--listing}
2507
2508 The listing feature of the assembler can be enabled via the command-line switch
2509 @samp{-a} (@pxref{a}). This feature combines the input source file(s) with a
2510 hex dump of the corresponding locations in the output object file, and displays
2511 them as a listing file. The format of this listing can be controlled by
2512 directives inside the assembler source (i.e., @code{.list} (@pxref{List}),
2513 @code{.title} (@pxref{Title}), @code{.sbttl} (@pxref{Sbttl}),
2514 @code{.psize} (@pxref{Psize}), and
2515 @code{.eject} (@pxref{Eject}) and also by the following switches:
2516
2517 @table @gcctabopt
2518 @item --listing-lhs-width=@samp{number}
2519 @kindex --listing-lhs-width
2520 @cindex Width of first line disassembly output
2521 Sets the maximum width, in words, of the first line of the hex byte dump. This
2522 dump appears on the left hand side of the listing output.
2523
2524 @item --listing-lhs-width2=@samp{number}
2525 @kindex --listing-lhs-width2
2526 @cindex Width of continuation lines of disassembly output
2527 Sets the maximum width, in words, of any further lines of the hex byte dump for
2528 a given input source line. If this value is not specified, it defaults to being
2529 the same as the value specified for @samp{--listing-lhs-width}. If neither
2530 switch is used the default is to one.
2531
2532 @item --listing-rhs-width=@samp{number}
2533 @kindex --listing-rhs-width
2534 @cindex Width of source line output
2535 Sets the maximum width, in characters, of the source line that is displayed
2536 alongside the hex dump. The default value for this parameter is 100. The
2537 source line is displayed on the right hand side of the listing output.
2538
2539 @item --listing-cont-lines=@samp{number}
2540 @kindex --listing-cont-lines
2541 @cindex Maximum number of continuation lines
2542 Sets the maximum number of continuation lines of hex dump that will be
2543 displayed for a given single line of source input. The default value is 4.
2544 @end table
2545
2546 @node M
2547 @section Assemble in MRI Compatibility Mode: @option{-M}
2548
2549 @kindex -M
2550 @cindex MRI compatibility mode
2551 The @option{-M} or @option{--mri} option selects MRI compatibility mode. This
2552 changes the syntax and pseudo-op handling of @command{@value{AS}} to make it
2553 compatible with the @code{ASM68K} assembler from Microtec Research.
2554 The exact nature of the
2555 MRI syntax will not be documented here; see the MRI manuals for more
2556 information. Note in particular that the handling of macros and macro
2557 arguments is somewhat different. The purpose of this option is to permit
2558 assembling existing MRI assembler code using @command{@value{AS}}.
2559
2560 The MRI compatibility is not complete. Certain operations of the MRI assembler
2561 depend upon its object file format, and can not be supported using other object
2562 file formats. Supporting these would require enhancing each object file format
2563 individually. These are:
2564
2565 @itemize @bullet
2566 @item global symbols in common section
2567
2568 The m68k MRI assembler supports common sections which are merged by the linker.
2569 Other object file formats do not support this. @command{@value{AS}} handles
2570 common sections by treating them as a single common symbol. It permits local
2571 symbols to be defined within a common section, but it can not support global
2572 symbols, since it has no way to describe them.
2573
2574 @item complex relocations
2575
2576 The MRI assemblers support relocations against a negated section address, and
2577 relocations which combine the start addresses of two or more sections. These
2578 are not support by other object file formats.
2579
2580 @item @code{END} pseudo-op specifying start address
2581
2582 The MRI @code{END} pseudo-op permits the specification of a start address.
2583 This is not supported by other object file formats. The start address may
2584 instead be specified using the @option{-e} option to the linker, or in a linker
2585 script.
2586
2587 @item @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops
2588
2589 The MRI @code{IDNT}, @code{.ident} and @code{NAME} pseudo-ops assign a module
2590 name to the output file. This is not supported by other object file formats.
2591
2592 @item @code{ORG} pseudo-op
2593
2594 The m68k MRI @code{ORG} pseudo-op begins an absolute section at a given
2595 address. This differs from the usual @command{@value{AS}} @code{.org} pseudo-op,
2596 which changes the location within the current section. Absolute sections are
2597 not supported by other object file formats. The address of a section may be
2598 assigned within a linker script.
2599 @end itemize
2600
2601 There are some other features of the MRI assembler which are not supported by
2602 @command{@value{AS}}, typically either because they are difficult or because they
2603 seem of little consequence. Some of these may be supported in future releases.
2604
2605 @itemize @bullet
2606
2607 @item EBCDIC strings
2608
2609 EBCDIC strings are not supported.
2610
2611 @item packed binary coded decimal
2612
2613 Packed binary coded decimal is not supported. This means that the @code{DC.P}
2614 and @code{DCB.P} pseudo-ops are not supported.
2615
2616 @item @code{FEQU} pseudo-op
2617
2618 The m68k @code{FEQU} pseudo-op is not supported.
2619
2620 @item @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op
2621
2622 The m68k @code{NOOBJ} pseudo-op is not supported.
2623
2624 @item @code{OPT} branch control options
2625
2626 The m68k @code{OPT} branch control options---@code{B}, @code{BRS}, @code{BRB},
2627 @code{BRL}, and @code{BRW}---are ignored. @command{@value{AS}} automatically
2628 relaxes all branches, whether forward or backward, to an appropriate size, so
2629 these options serve no purpose.
2630
2631 @item @code{OPT} list control options
2632
2633 The following m68k @code{OPT} list control options are ignored: @code{C},
2634 @code{CEX}, @code{CL}, @code{CRE}, @code{E}, @code{G}, @code{I}, @code{M},
2635 @code{MEX}, @code{MC}, @code{MD}, @code{X}.
2636
2637 @item other @code{OPT} options
2638
2639 The following m68k @code{OPT} options are ignored: @code{NEST}, @code{O},
2640 @code{OLD}, @code{OP}, @code{P}, @code{PCO}, @code{PCR}, @code{PCS}, @code{R}.
2641
2642 @item @code{OPT} @code{D} option is default
2643
2644 The m68k @code{OPT} @code{D} option is the default, unlike the MRI assembler.
2645 @code{OPT NOD} may be used to turn it off.
2646
2647 @item @code{XREF} pseudo-op.
2648
2649 The m68k @code{XREF} pseudo-op is ignored.
2650
2651 @end itemize
2652
2653 @node MD
2654 @section Dependency Tracking: @option{--MD}
2655
2656 @kindex --MD
2657 @cindex dependency tracking
2658 @cindex make rules
2659
2660 @command{@value{AS}} can generate a dependency file for the file it creates. This
2661 file consists of a single rule suitable for @code{make} describing the
2662 dependencies of the main source file.
2663
2664 The rule is written to the file named in its argument.
2665
2666 This feature is used in the automatic updating of makefiles.
2667
2668 @node no-pad-sections
2669 @section Output Section Padding
2670 @kindex --no-pad-sections
2671 @cindex output section padding
2672 Normally the assembler will pad the end of each output section up to its
2673 alignment boundary. But this can waste space, which can be significant on
2674 memory constrained targets. So the @option{--no-pad-sections} option will
2675 disable this behaviour.
2676
2677 @node o
2678 @section Name the Object File: @option{-o}
2679
2680 @kindex -o
2681 @cindex naming object file
2682 @cindex object file name
2683 There is always one object file output when you run @command{@value{AS}}. By
2684 default it has the name @file{a.out}.
2685 You use this option (which takes exactly one filename) to give the
2686 object file a different name.
2687
2688 Whatever the object file is called, @command{@value{AS}} overwrites any
2689 existing file of the same name.
2690
2691 @node R
2692 @section Join Data and Text Sections: @option{-R}
2693
2694 @kindex -R
2695 @cindex data and text sections, joining
2696 @cindex text and data sections, joining
2697 @cindex joining text and data sections
2698 @cindex merging text and data sections
2699 @option{-R} tells @command{@value{AS}} to write the object file as if all
2700 data-section data lives in the text section. This is only done at
2701 the very last moment: your binary data are the same, but data
2702 section parts are relocated differently. The data section part of
2703 your object file is zero bytes long because all its bytes are
2704 appended to the text section. (@xref{Sections,,Sections and Relocation}.)
2705
2706 When you specify @option{-R} it would be possible to generate shorter
2707 address displacements (because we do not have to cross between text and
2708 data section). We refrain from doing this simply for compatibility with
2709 older versions of @command{@value{AS}}. In future, @option{-R} may work this way.
2710
2711 @ifset COFF-ELF
2712 When @command{@value{AS}} is configured for COFF or ELF output,
2713 this option is only useful if you use sections named @samp{.text} and
2714 @samp{.data}.
2715 @end ifset
2716
2717 @ifset HPPA
2718 @option{-R} is not supported for any of the HPPA targets. Using
2719 @option{-R} generates a warning from @command{@value{AS}}.
2720 @end ifset
2721
2722 @node statistics
2723 @section Display Assembly Statistics: @option{--statistics}
2724
2725 @kindex --statistics
2726 @cindex statistics, about assembly
2727 @cindex time, total for assembly
2728 @cindex space used, maximum for assembly
2729 Use @samp{--statistics} to display two statistics about the resources used by
2730 @command{@value{AS}}: the maximum amount of space allocated during the assembly
2731 (in bytes), and the total execution time taken for the assembly (in @sc{cpu}
2732 seconds).
2733
2734 @node traditional-format
2735 @section Compatible Output: @option{--traditional-format}
2736
2737 @kindex --traditional-format
2738 For some targets, the output of @command{@value{AS}} is different in some ways
2739 from the output of some existing assembler. This switch requests
2740 @command{@value{AS}} to use the traditional format instead.
2741
2742 For example, it disables the exception frame optimizations which
2743 @command{@value{AS}} normally does by default on @code{@value{GCC}} output.
2744
2745 @node v
2746 @section Announce Version: @option{-v}
2747
2748 @kindex -v
2749 @kindex -version
2750 @cindex assembler version
2751 @cindex version of assembler
2752 You can find out what version of as is running by including the
2753 option @samp{-v} (which you can also spell as @samp{-version}) on the
2754 command line.
2755
2756 @node W
2757 @section Control Warnings: @option{-W}, @option{--warn}, @option{--no-warn}, @option{--fatal-warnings}
2758
2759 @command{@value{AS}} should never give a warning or error message when
2760 assembling compiler output. But programs written by people often
2761 cause @command{@value{AS}} to give a warning that a particular assumption was
2762 made. All such warnings are directed to the standard error file.
2763
2764 @kindex -W
2765 @kindex --no-warn
2766 @cindex suppressing warnings
2767 @cindex warnings, suppressing
2768 If you use the @option{-W} and @option{--no-warn} options, no warnings are issued.
2769 This only affects the warning messages: it does not change any particular of
2770 how @command{@value{AS}} assembles your file. Errors, which stop the assembly,
2771 are still reported.
2772
2773 @kindex --fatal-warnings
2774 @cindex errors, caused by warnings
2775 @cindex warnings, causing error
2776 If you use the @option{--fatal-warnings} option, @command{@value{AS}} considers
2777 files that generate warnings to be in error.
2778
2779 @kindex --warn
2780 @cindex warnings, switching on
2781 You can switch these options off again by specifying @option{--warn}, which
2782 causes warnings to be output as usual.
2783
2784 @node Z
2785 @section Generate Object File in Spite of Errors: @option{-Z}
2786 @cindex object file, after errors
2787 @cindex errors, continuing after
2788 After an error message, @command{@value{AS}} normally produces no output. If for
2789 some reason you are interested in object file output even after
2790 @command{@value{AS}} gives an error message on your program, use the @samp{-Z}
2791 option. If there are any errors, @command{@value{AS}} continues anyways, and
2792 writes an object file after a final warning message of the form @samp{@var{n}
2793 errors, @var{m} warnings, generating bad object file.}
2794
2795 @node Syntax
2796 @chapter Syntax
2797
2798 @cindex machine-independent syntax
2799 @cindex syntax, machine-independent
2800 This chapter describes the machine-independent syntax allowed in a
2801 source file. @command{@value{AS}} syntax is similar to what many other
2802 assemblers use; it is inspired by the BSD 4.2
2803 @ifclear VAX
2804 assembler.
2805 @end ifclear
2806 @ifset VAX
2807 assembler, except that @command{@value{AS}} does not assemble Vax bit-fields.
2808 @end ifset
2809
2810 @menu
2811 * Preprocessing:: Preprocessing
2812 * Whitespace:: Whitespace
2813 * Comments:: Comments
2814 * Symbol Intro:: Symbols
2815 * Statements:: Statements
2816 * Constants:: Constants
2817 @end menu
2818
2819 @node Preprocessing
2820 @section Preprocessing
2821
2822 @cindex preprocessing
2823 The @command{@value{AS}} internal preprocessor:
2824 @itemize @bullet
2825 @cindex whitespace, removed by preprocessor
2826 @item
2827 adjusts and removes extra whitespace. It leaves one space or tab before
2828 the keywords on a line, and turns any other whitespace on the line into
2829 a single space.
2830
2831 @cindex comments, removed by preprocessor
2832 @item
2833 removes all comments, replacing them with a single space, or an
2834 appropriate number of newlines.
2835
2836 @cindex constants, converted by preprocessor
2837 @item
2838 converts character constants into the appropriate numeric values.
2839 @end itemize
2840
2841 It does not do macro processing, include file handling, or
2842 anything else you may get from your C compiler's preprocessor. You can
2843 do include file processing with the @code{.include} directive
2844 (@pxref{Include,,@code{.include}}). You can use the @sc{gnu} C compiler driver
2845 to get other ``CPP'' style preprocessing by giving the input file a
2846 @samp{.S} suffix. @url{https://gcc.gnu.org/onlinedocs/gcc/Overall-Options.html#Overall-Options,
2847 See the 'Options Controlling the Kind of Output' section of the GCC manual for
2848 more details}
2849
2850 Excess whitespace, comments, and character constants
2851 cannot be used in the portions of the input text that are not
2852 preprocessed.
2853
2854 @cindex turning preprocessing on and off
2855 @cindex preprocessing, turning on and off
2856 @kindex #NO_APP
2857 @kindex #APP
2858 If the first line of an input file is @code{#NO_APP} or if you use the
2859 @samp{-f} option, whitespace and comments are not removed from the input file.
2860 Within an input file, you can ask for whitespace and comment removal in
2861 specific portions of the by putting a line that says @code{#APP} before the
2862 text that may contain whitespace or comments, and putting a line that says
2863 @code{#NO_APP} after this text. This feature is mainly intend to support
2864 @code{asm} statements in compilers whose output is otherwise free of comments
2865 and whitespace.
2866
2867 @node Whitespace
2868 @section Whitespace
2869
2870 @cindex whitespace
2871 @dfn{Whitespace} is one or more blanks or tabs, in any order.
2872 Whitespace is used to separate symbols, and to make programs neater for
2873 people to read. Unless within character constants
2874 (@pxref{Characters,,Character Constants}), any whitespace means the same
2875 as exactly one space.
2876
2877 @node Comments
2878 @section Comments
2879
2880 @cindex comments
2881 There are two ways of rendering comments to @command{@value{AS}}. In both
2882 cases the comment is equivalent to one space.
2883
2884 Anything from @samp{/*} through the next @samp{*/} is a comment.
2885 This means you may not nest these comments.
2886
2887 @smallexample
2888 /*
2889 The only way to include a newline ('\n') in a comment
2890 is to use this sort of comment.
2891 */
2892
2893 /* This sort of comment does not nest. */
2894 @end smallexample
2895
2896 @cindex line comment character
2897 Anything from a @dfn{line comment} character up to the next newline is
2898 considered a comment and is ignored. The line comment character is target
2899 specific, and some targets multiple comment characters. Some targets also have
2900 line comment characters that only work if they are the first character on a
2901 line. Some targets use a sequence of two characters to introduce a line
2902 comment. Some targets can also change their line comment characters depending
2903 upon command-line options that have been used. For more details see the
2904 @emph{Syntax} section in the documentation for individual targets.
2905
2906 If the line comment character is the hash sign (@samp{#}) then it still has the
2907 special ability to enable and disable preprocessing (@pxref{Preprocessing}) and
2908 to specify logical line numbers:
2909
2910 @kindex #
2911 @cindex lines starting with @code{#}
2912 @cindex logical line numbers
2913 To be compatible with past assemblers, lines that begin with @samp{#} have a
2914 special interpretation. Following the @samp{#} should be an absolute
2915 expression (@pxref{Expressions}): the logical line number of the @emph{next}
2916 line. Then a string (@pxref{Strings, ,Strings}) is allowed: if present it is a
2917 new logical file name. The rest of the line, if any, should be whitespace.
2918
2919 If the first non-whitespace characters on the line are not numeric,
2920 the line is ignored. (Just like a comment.)
2921
2922 @smallexample
2923 # This is an ordinary comment.
2924 # 42-6 "new_file_name" # New logical file name
2925 # This is logical line # 36.
2926 @end smallexample
2927 This feature is deprecated, and may disappear from future versions
2928 of @command{@value{AS}}.
2929
2930 @node Symbol Intro
2931 @section Symbols
2932
2933 @cindex characters used in symbols
2934 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
2935 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2936 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2937 @samp{_.$}.
2938 @end ifclear
2939 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
2940 @ifclear GENERIC
2941 @ifset H8
2942 A @dfn{symbol} is one or more characters chosen from the set of all
2943 letters (both upper and lower case), digits and the three characters
2944 @samp{._$}. (Save that, on the H8/300 only, you may not use @samp{$} in
2945 symbol names.)
2946 @end ifset
2947 @end ifclear
2948 @end ifset
2949 @ifset GENERIC
2950 On most machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions
2951 are noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}.
2952 @end ifset
2953 No symbol may begin with a digit. Case is significant.
2954 There is no length limit; all characters are significant. Multibyte characters
2955 are supported. Symbols are delimited by characters not in that set, or by the
2956 beginning of a file (since the source program must end with a newline, the end
2957 of a file is not a possible symbol delimiter). @xref{Symbols}.
2958
2959 Symbol names may also be enclosed in double quote @code{"} characters. In such
2960 cases any characters are allowed, except for the NUL character. If a double
2961 quote character is to be included in the symbol name it must be preceeded by a
2962 backslash @code{\} character.
2963 @cindex length of symbols
2964
2965 @node Statements
2966 @section Statements
2967
2968 @cindex statements, structure of
2969 @cindex line separator character
2970 @cindex statement separator character
2971
2972 A @dfn{statement} ends at a newline character (@samp{\n}) or a
2973 @dfn{line separator character}. The line separator character is target
2974 specific and described in the @emph{Syntax} section of each
2975 target's documentation. Not all targets support a line separator character.
2976 The newline or line separator character is considered to be part of the
2977 preceding statement. Newlines and separators within character constants are an
2978 exception: they do not end statements.
2979
2980 @cindex newline, required at file end
2981 @cindex EOF, newline must precede
2982 It is an error to end any statement with end-of-file: the last
2983 character of any input file should be a newline.@refill
2984
2985 An empty statement is allowed, and may include whitespace. It is ignored.
2986
2987 @cindex instructions and directives
2988 @cindex directives and instructions
2989 @c "key symbol" is not used elsewhere in the document; seems pedantic to
2990 @c @defn{} it in that case, as was done previously... doc@cygnus.com,
2991 @c 13feb91.
2992 A statement begins with zero or more labels, optionally followed by a
2993 key symbol which determines what kind of statement it is. The key
2994 symbol determines the syntax of the rest of the statement. If the
2995 symbol begins with a dot @samp{.} then the statement is an assembler
2996 directive: typically valid for any computer. If the symbol begins with
2997 a letter the statement is an assembly language @dfn{instruction}: it
2998 assembles into a machine language instruction.
2999 @ifset GENERIC
3000 Different versions of @command{@value{AS}} for different computers
3001 recognize different instructions. In fact, the same symbol may
3002 represent a different instruction in a different computer's assembly
3003 language.@refill
3004 @end ifset
3005
3006 @cindex @code{:} (label)
3007 @cindex label (@code{:})
3008 A label is a symbol immediately followed by a colon (@code{:}).
3009 Whitespace before a label or after a colon is permitted, but you may not
3010 have whitespace between a label's symbol and its colon. @xref{Labels}.
3011
3012 @ifset HPPA
3013 For HPPA targets, labels need not be immediately followed by a colon, but
3014 the definition of a label must begin in column zero. This also implies that
3015 only one label may be defined on each line.
3016 @end ifset
3017
3018 @smallexample
3019 label: .directive followed by something
3020 another_label: # This is an empty statement.
3021 instruction operand_1, operand_2, @dots{}
3022 @end smallexample
3023
3024 @node Constants
3025 @section Constants
3026
3027 @cindex constants
3028 A constant is a number, written so that its value is known by
3029 inspection, without knowing any context. Like this:
3030 @smallexample
3031 @group
3032 .byte 74, 0112, 092, 0x4A, 0X4a, 'J, '\J # All the same value.
3033 .ascii "Ring the bell\7" # A string constant.
3034 .octa 0x123456789abcdef0123456789ABCDEF0 # A bignum.
3035 .float 0f-314159265358979323846264338327\
3036 95028841971.693993751E-40 # - pi, a flonum.
3037 @end group
3038 @end smallexample
3039
3040 @menu
3041 * Characters:: Character Constants
3042 * Numbers:: Number Constants
3043 @end menu
3044
3045 @node Characters
3046 @subsection Character Constants
3047
3048 @cindex character constants
3049 @cindex constants, character
3050 There are two kinds of character constants. A @dfn{character} stands
3051 for one character in one byte and its value may be used in
3052 numeric expressions. String constants (properly called string
3053 @emph{literals}) are potentially many bytes and their values may not be
3054 used in arithmetic expressions.
3055
3056 @menu
3057 * Strings:: Strings
3058 * Chars:: Characters
3059 @end menu
3060
3061 @node Strings
3062 @subsubsection Strings
3063
3064 @cindex string constants
3065 @cindex constants, string
3066 A @dfn{string} is written between double-quotes. It may contain
3067 double-quotes or null characters. The way to get special characters
3068 into a string is to @dfn{escape} these characters: precede them with
3069 a backslash @samp{\} character. For example @samp{\\} represents
3070 one backslash: the first @code{\} is an escape which tells
3071 @command{@value{AS}} to interpret the second character literally as a backslash
3072 (which prevents @command{@value{AS}} from recognizing the second @code{\} as an
3073 escape character). The complete list of escapes follows.
3074
3075 @cindex escape codes, character
3076 @cindex character escape codes
3077 @c NOTE: Cindex entries must not start with a backlash character.
3078 @c NOTE: This confuses the pdf2texi script when it is creating the
3079 @c NOTE: index based upon the first character and so it generates:
3080 @c NOTE: \initial {\\}
3081 @c NOTE: which then results in the error message:
3082 @c NOTE: Argument of \\ has an extra }.
3083 @c NOTE: So in the index entries below a space character has been
3084 @c NOTE: prepended to avoid this problem.
3085 @table @kbd
3086 @c @item \a
3087 @c Mnemonic for ACKnowledge; for ASCII this is octal code 007.
3088 @c
3089 @cindex @code{ \b} (backspace character)
3090 @cindex backspace (@code{\b})
3091 @item \b
3092 Mnemonic for backspace; for ASCII this is octal code 010.
3093
3094 @c @item \e
3095 @c Mnemonic for EOText; for ASCII this is octal code 004.
3096 @c
3097 @cindex @code{ \f} (formfeed character)
3098 @cindex formfeed (@code{\f})
3099 @item backslash-f
3100 Mnemonic for FormFeed; for ASCII this is octal code 014.
3101
3102 @cindex @code{ \n} (newline character)
3103 @cindex newline (@code{\n})
3104 @item \n
3105 Mnemonic for newline; for ASCII this is octal code 012.
3106
3107 @c @item \p
3108 @c Mnemonic for prefix; for ASCII this is octal code 033, usually known as @code{escape}.
3109 @c
3110 @cindex @code{ \r} (carriage return character)
3111 @cindex carriage return (@code{backslash-r})
3112 @item \r
3113 Mnemonic for carriage-Return; for ASCII this is octal code 015.
3114
3115 @c @item \s
3116 @c Mnemonic for space; for ASCII this is octal code 040. Included for compliance with
3117 @c other assemblers.
3118 @c
3119 @cindex @code{ \t} (tab)
3120 @cindex tab (@code{\t})
3121 @item \t
3122 Mnemonic for horizontal Tab; for ASCII this is octal code 011.
3123
3124 @c @item \v
3125 @c Mnemonic for Vertical tab; for ASCII this is octal code 013.
3126 @c @item \x @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3127 @c A hexadecimal character code. The numeric code is 3 hexadecimal digits.
3128 @c
3129 @cindex @code{ \@var{ddd}} (octal character code)
3130 @cindex octal character code (@code{\@var{ddd}})
3131 @item \ @var{digit} @var{digit} @var{digit}
3132 An octal character code. The numeric code is 3 octal digits.
3133 For compatibility with other Unix systems, 8 and 9 are accepted as digits:
3134 for example, @code{\008} has the value 010, and @code{\009} the value 011.
3135
3136 @cindex @code{ \@var{xd...}} (hex character code)
3137 @cindex hex character code (@code{\@var{xd...}})
3138 @item \@code{x} @var{hex-digits...}
3139 A hex character code. All trailing hex digits are combined. Either upper or
3140 lower case @code{x} works.
3141
3142 @cindex @code{ \\} (@samp{\} character)
3143 @cindex backslash (@code{\\})
3144 @item \\
3145 Represents one @samp{\} character.
3146
3147 @c @item \'
3148 @c Represents one @samp{'} (accent acute) character.
3149 @c This is needed in single character literals
3150 @c (@xref{Characters,,Character Constants}.) to represent
3151 @c a @samp{'}.
3152 @c
3153 @cindex @code{ \"} (doublequote character)
3154 @cindex doublequote (@code{\"})
3155 @item \"
3156 Represents one @samp{"} character. Needed in strings to represent
3157 this character, because an unescaped @samp{"} would end the string.
3158
3159 @item \ @var{anything-else}
3160 Any other character when escaped by @kbd{\} gives a warning, but
3161 assembles as if the @samp{\} was not present. The idea is that if
3162 you used an escape sequence you clearly didn't want the literal
3163 interpretation of the following character. However @command{@value{AS}} has no
3164 other interpretation, so @command{@value{AS}} knows it is giving you the wrong
3165 code and warns you of the fact.
3166 @end table
3167
3168 Which characters are escapable, and what those escapes represent,
3169 varies widely among assemblers. The current set is what we think
3170 the BSD 4.2 assembler recognizes, and is a subset of what most C
3171 compilers recognize. If you are in doubt, do not use an escape
3172 sequence.
3173
3174 @node Chars
3175 @subsubsection Characters
3176
3177 @cindex single character constant
3178 @cindex character, single
3179 @cindex constant, single character
3180 A single character may be written as a single quote immediately followed by
3181 that character. Some backslash escapes apply to characters, @code{\b},
3182 @code{\f}, @code{\n}, @code{\r}, @code{\t}, and @code{\"} with the same meaning
3183 as for strings, plus @code{\'} for a single quote. So if you want to write the
3184 character backslash, you must write @kbd{'\\} where the first @code{\} escapes
3185 the second @code{\}. As you can see, the quote is an acute accent, not a grave
3186 accent. A newline
3187 @ifclear GENERIC
3188 @ifclear abnormal-separator
3189 (or semicolon @samp{;})
3190 @end ifclear
3191 @ifset abnormal-separator
3192 @ifset H8
3193 (or dollar sign @samp{$}, for the H8/300; or semicolon @samp{;} for the
3194 Renesas SH)
3195 @end ifset
3196 @end ifset
3197 @end ifclear
3198 immediately following an acute accent is taken as a literal character
3199 and does not count as the end of a statement. The value of a character
3200 constant in a numeric expression is the machine's byte-wide code for
3201 that character. @command{@value{AS}} assumes your character code is ASCII:
3202 @kbd{'A} means 65, @kbd{'B} means 66, and so on. @refill
3203
3204 @node Numbers
3205 @subsection Number Constants
3206
3207 @cindex constants, number
3208 @cindex number constants
3209 @command{@value{AS}} distinguishes three kinds of numbers according to how they
3210 are stored in the target machine. @emph{Integers} are numbers that
3211 would fit into an @code{int} in the C language. @emph{Bignums} are
3212 integers, but they are stored in more than 32 bits. @emph{Flonums}
3213 are floating point numbers, described below.
3214
3215 @menu
3216 * Integers:: Integers
3217 * Bignums:: Bignums
3218 * Flonums:: Flonums
3219 @ifclear GENERIC
3220 @end ifclear
3221 @end menu
3222
3223 @node Integers
3224 @subsubsection Integers
3225 @cindex integers
3226 @cindex constants, integer
3227
3228 @cindex binary integers
3229 @cindex integers, binary
3230 A binary integer is @samp{0b} or @samp{0B} followed by zero or more of
3231 the binary digits @samp{01}.
3232
3233 @cindex octal integers
3234 @cindex integers, octal
3235 An octal integer is @samp{0} followed by zero or more of the octal
3236 digits (@samp{01234567}).
3237
3238 @cindex decimal integers
3239 @cindex integers, decimal
3240 A decimal integer starts with a non-zero digit followed by zero or
3241 more digits (@samp{0123456789}).
3242
3243 @cindex hexadecimal integers
3244 @cindex integers, hexadecimal
3245 A hexadecimal integer is @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} followed by one or
3246 more hexadecimal digits chosen from @samp{0123456789abcdefABCDEF}.
3247
3248 Integers have the usual values. To denote a negative integer, use
3249 the prefix operator @samp{-} discussed under expressions
3250 (@pxref{Prefix Ops,,Prefix Operators}).
3251
3252 @node Bignums
3253 @subsubsection Bignums
3254
3255 @cindex bignums
3256 @cindex constants, bignum
3257 A @dfn{bignum} has the same syntax and semantics as an integer
3258 except that the number (or its negative) takes more than 32 bits to
3259 represent in binary. The distinction is made because in some places
3260 integers are permitted while bignums are not.
3261
3262 @node Flonums
3263 @subsubsection Flonums
3264 @cindex flonums
3265 @cindex floating point numbers
3266 @cindex constants, floating point
3267
3268 @cindex precision, floating point
3269 A @dfn{flonum} represents a floating point number. The translation is
3270 indirect: a decimal floating point number from the text is converted by
3271 @command{@value{AS}} to a generic binary floating point number of more than
3272 sufficient precision. This generic floating point number is converted
3273 to a particular computer's floating point format (or formats) by a
3274 portion of @command{@value{AS}} specialized to that computer.
3275
3276 A flonum is written by writing (in order)
3277 @itemize @bullet
3278 @item
3279 The digit @samp{0}.
3280 @ifset HPPA
3281 (@samp{0} is optional on the HPPA.)
3282 @end ifset
3283
3284 @item
3285 A letter, to tell @command{@value{AS}} the rest of the number is a flonum.
3286 @ifset GENERIC
3287 @kbd{e} is recommended. Case is not important.
3288 @ignore
3289 @c FIXME: verify if flonum syntax really this vague for most cases
3290 (Any otherwise illegal letter works here, but that might be changed. Vax BSD
3291 4.2 assembler seems to allow any of @samp{defghDEFGH}.)
3292 @end ignore
3293
3294 On the H8/300 and Renesas / SuperH SH architectures, the letter must be
3295 one of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3296
3297 On the ARC, the letter must be one of the letters @samp{DFRS}
3298 (in upper or lower case).
3299
3300 On the HPPA architecture, the letter must be @samp{E} (upper case only).
3301 @end ifset
3302 @ifclear GENERIC
3303 @ifset ARC
3304 One of the letters @samp{DFRS} (in upper or lower case).
3305 @end ifset
3306 @ifset H8
3307 One of the letters @samp{DFPRSX} (in upper or lower case).
3308 @end ifset
3309 @ifset HPPA
3310 The letter @samp{E} (upper case only).
3311 @end ifset
3312 @end ifclear
3313
3314 @item
3315 An optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3316
3317 @item
3318 An optional @dfn{integer part}: zero or more decimal digits.
3319
3320 @item
3321 An optional @dfn{fractional part}: @samp{.} followed by zero
3322 or more decimal digits.
3323
3324 @item
3325 An optional exponent, consisting of:
3326
3327 @itemize @bullet
3328 @item
3329 An @samp{E} or @samp{e}.
3330 @c I can't find a config where "EXP_CHARS" is other than 'eE', but in
3331 @c principle this can perfectly well be different on different targets.
3332 @item
3333 Optional sign: either @samp{+} or @samp{-}.
3334 @item
3335 One or more decimal digits.
3336 @end itemize
3337
3338 @end itemize
3339
3340 At least one of the integer part or the fractional part must be
3341 present. The floating point number has the usual base-10 value.
3342
3343 @command{@value{AS}} does all processing using integers. Flonums are computed
3344 independently of any floating point hardware in the computer running
3345 @command{@value{AS}}.
3346
3347 @node Sections
3348 @chapter Sections and Relocation
3349 @cindex sections
3350 @cindex relocation
3351
3352 @menu
3353 * Secs Background:: Background
3354 * Ld Sections:: Linker Sections
3355 * As Sections:: Assembler Internal Sections
3356 * Sub-Sections:: Sub-Sections
3357 * bss:: bss Section
3358 @end menu
3359
3360 @node Secs Background
3361 @section Background
3362
3363 Roughly, a section is a range of addresses, with no gaps; all data
3364 ``in'' those addresses is treated the same for some particular purpose.
3365 For example there may be a ``read only'' section.
3366
3367 @cindex linker, and assembler
3368 @cindex assembler, and linker
3369 The linker @code{@value{LD}} reads many object files (partial programs) and
3370 combines their contents to form a runnable program. When @command{@value{AS}}
3371 emits an object file, the partial program is assumed to start at address 0.
3372 @code{@value{LD}} assigns the final addresses for the partial program, so that
3373 different partial programs do not overlap. This is actually an
3374 oversimplification, but it suffices to explain how @command{@value{AS}} uses
3375 sections.
3376
3377 @code{@value{LD}} moves blocks of bytes of your program to their run-time
3378 addresses. These blocks slide to their run-time addresses as rigid
3379 units; their length does not change and neither does the order of bytes
3380 within them. Such a rigid unit is called a @emph{section}. Assigning
3381 run-time addresses to sections is called @dfn{relocation}. It includes
3382 the task of adjusting mentions of object-file addresses so they refer to
3383 the proper run-time addresses.
3384 @ifset H8
3385 For the H8/300, and for the Renesas / SuperH SH,
3386 @command{@value{AS}} pads sections if needed to
3387 ensure they end on a word (sixteen bit) boundary.
3388 @end ifset
3389
3390 @cindex standard assembler sections
3391 An object file written by @command{@value{AS}} has at least three sections, any
3392 of which may be empty. These are named @dfn{text}, @dfn{data} and
3393 @dfn{bss} sections.
3394
3395 @ifset COFF-ELF
3396 @ifset GENERIC
3397 When it generates COFF or ELF output,
3398 @end ifset
3399 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you specify
3400 using the @samp{.section} directive (@pxref{Section,,@code{.section}}).
3401 If you do not use any directives that place output in the @samp{.text}
3402 or @samp{.data} sections, these sections still exist, but are empty.
3403 @end ifset
3404
3405 @ifset HPPA
3406 @ifset GENERIC
3407 When @command{@value{AS}} generates SOM or ELF output for the HPPA,
3408 @end ifset
3409 @command{@value{AS}} can also generate whatever other named sections you
3410 specify using the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace} directives. See
3411 @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly Language Reference Manual}
3412 (HP 92432-90001) for details on the @samp{.space} and @samp{.subspace}
3413 assembler directives.
3414
3415 @ifset SOM
3416 Additionally, @command{@value{AS}} uses different names for the standard
3417 text, data, and bss sections when generating SOM output. Program text
3418 is placed into the @samp{$CODE$} section, data into @samp{$DATA$}, and
3419 BSS into @samp{$BSS$}.
3420 @end ifset
3421 @end ifset
3422
3423 Within the object file, the text section starts at address @code{0}, the
3424 data section follows, and the bss section follows the data section.
3425
3426 @ifset HPPA
3427 When generating either SOM or ELF output files on the HPPA, the text
3428 section starts at address @code{0}, the data section at address
3429 @code{0x4000000}, and the bss section follows the data section.
3430 @end ifset
3431
3432 To let @code{@value{LD}} know which data changes when the sections are
3433 relocated, and how to change that data, @command{@value{AS}} also writes to the
3434 object file details of the relocation needed. To perform relocation
3435 @code{@value{LD}} must know, each time an address in the object
3436 file is mentioned:
3437 @itemize @bullet
3438 @item
3439 Where in the object file is the beginning of this reference to
3440 an address?
3441 @item
3442 How long (in bytes) is this reference?
3443 @item
3444 Which section does the address refer to? What is the numeric value of
3445 @display
3446 (@var{address}) @minus{} (@var{start-address of section})?
3447 @end display
3448 @item
3449 Is the reference to an address ``Program-Counter relative''?
3450 @end itemize
3451
3452 @cindex addresses, format of
3453 @cindex section-relative addressing
3454 In fact, every address @command{@value{AS}} ever uses is expressed as
3455 @display
3456 (@var{section}) + (@var{offset into section})
3457 @end display
3458 @noindent
3459 Further, most expressions @command{@value{AS}} computes have this section-relative
3460 nature.
3461 @ifset SOM
3462 (For some object formats, such as SOM for the HPPA, some expressions are
3463 symbol-relative instead.)
3464 @end ifset
3465
3466 In this manual we use the notation @{@var{secname} @var{N}@} to mean ``offset
3467 @var{N} into section @var{secname}.''
3468
3469 Apart from text, data and bss sections you need to know about the
3470 @dfn{absolute} section. When @code{@value{LD}} mixes partial programs,
3471 addresses in the absolute section remain unchanged. For example, address
3472 @code{@{absolute 0@}} is ``relocated'' to run-time address 0 by
3473 @code{@value{LD}}. Although the linker never arranges two partial programs'
3474 data sections with overlapping addresses after linking, @emph{by definition}
3475 their absolute sections must overlap. Address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in one
3476 part of a program is always the same address when the program is running as
3477 address @code{@{absolute@ 239@}} in any other part of the program.
3478
3479 The idea of sections is extended to the @dfn{undefined} section. Any
3480 address whose section is unknown at assembly time is by definition
3481 rendered @{undefined @var{U}@}---where @var{U} is filled in later.
3482 Since numbers are always defined, the only way to generate an undefined
3483 address is to mention an undefined symbol. A reference to a named
3484 common block would be such a symbol: its value is unknown at assembly
3485 time so it has section @emph{undefined}.
3486
3487 By analogy the word @emph{section} is used to describe groups of sections in
3488 the linked program. @code{@value{LD}} puts all partial programs' text
3489 sections in contiguous addresses in the linked program. It is
3490 customary to refer to the @emph{text section} of a program, meaning all
3491 the addresses of all partial programs' text sections. Likewise for
3492 data and bss sections.
3493
3494 Some sections are manipulated by @code{@value{LD}}; others are invented for
3495 use of @command{@value{AS}} and have no meaning except during assembly.
3496
3497 @node Ld Sections
3498 @section Linker Sections
3499 @code{@value{LD}} deals with just four kinds of sections, summarized below.
3500
3501 @table @strong
3502
3503 @ifset COFF-ELF
3504 @cindex named sections
3505 @cindex sections, named
3506 @item named sections
3507 @end ifset
3508 @ifset aout
3509 @cindex text section
3510 @cindex data section
3511 @itemx text section
3512 @itemx data section
3513 @end ifset
3514 These sections hold your program. @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} treat them as
3515 separate but equal sections. Anything you can say of one section is
3516 true of another.
3517 @c @ifset aout
3518 When the program is running, however, it is
3519 customary for the text section to be unalterable. The
3520 text section is often shared among processes: it contains
3521 instructions, constants and the like. The data section of a running
3522 program is usually alterable: for example, C variables would be stored
3523 in the data section.
3524 @c @end ifset
3525
3526 @cindex bss section
3527 @item bss section
3528 This section contains zeroed bytes when your program begins running. It
3529 is used to hold uninitialized variables or common storage. The length of
3530 each partial program's bss section is important, but because it starts
3531 out containing zeroed bytes there is no need to store explicit zero
3532 bytes in the object file. The bss section was invented to eliminate
3533 those explicit zeros from object files.
3534
3535 @cindex absolute section
3536 @item absolute section
3537 Address 0 of this section is always ``relocated'' to runtime address 0.
3538 This is useful if you want to refer to an address that @code{@value{LD}} must
3539 not change when relocating. In this sense we speak of absolute
3540 addresses being ``unrelocatable'': they do not change during relocation.
3541
3542 @cindex undefined section
3543 @item undefined section
3544 This ``section'' is a catch-all for address references to objects not in
3545 the preceding sections.
3546 @c FIXME: ref to some other doc on obj-file formats could go here.
3547 @end table
3548
3549 @cindex relocation example
3550 An idealized example of three relocatable sections follows.
3551 @ifset COFF-ELF
3552 The example uses the traditional section names @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}.
3553 @end ifset
3554 Memory addresses are on the horizontal axis.
3555
3556 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3557 @ifnottex
3558 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3559 @smallexample
3560 +-----+----+--+
3561 partial program # 1: |ttttt|dddd|00|
3562 +-----+----+--+
3563
3564 text data bss
3565 seg. seg. seg.
3566
3567 +---+---+---+
3568 partial program # 2: |TTT|DDD|000|
3569 +---+---+---+
3570
3571 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3572 linked program: | |TTT|ttttt| |dddd|DDD|00000|
3573 +--+---+-----+--+----+---+-----+~~
3574
3575 addresses: 0 @dots{}
3576 @end smallexample
3577 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3578 @end ifnottex
3579 @need 5000
3580 @tex
3581 \bigskip
3582 \line{\it Partial program \#1: \hfil}
3583 \line{\ibox{2.5cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3584 \line{\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt ttttt}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 00}\hfil}
3585
3586 \line{\it Partial program \#2: \hfil}
3587 \line{\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{1.5cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3588 \line{\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt DDDD}\boxit{1cm}{\tt 000}\hfil}
3589
3590 \line{\it linked program: \hfil}
3591 \line{\ibox{.5cm}{}\ibox{1cm}{\tt text}\ibox{2.5cm}{}\ibox{.75cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt data}\ibox{1.5cm}{}\ibox{2cm}{\tt bss}\hfil}
3592 \line{\boxit{.5cm}{}\boxit{1cm}{\tt TTT}\boxit{2.5cm}{\tt
3593 ttttt}\boxit{.75cm}{}\boxit{2cm}{\tt dddd}\boxit{1.5cm}{\tt
3594 DDDD}\boxit{2cm}{\tt 00000}\ \dots\hfil}
3595
3596 \line{\it addresses: \hfil}
3597 \line{0\dots\hfil}
3598
3599 @end tex
3600 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
3601
3602 @node As Sections
3603 @section Assembler Internal Sections
3604
3605 @cindex internal assembler sections
3606 @cindex sections in messages, internal
3607 These sections are meant only for the internal use of @command{@value{AS}}. They
3608 have no meaning at run-time. You do not really need to know about these
3609 sections for most purposes; but they can be mentioned in @command{@value{AS}}
3610 warning messages, so it might be helpful to have an idea of their
3611 meanings to @command{@value{AS}}. These sections are used to permit the
3612 value of every expression in your assembly language program to be a
3613 section-relative address.
3614
3615 @table @b
3616 @cindex assembler internal logic error
3617 @item ASSEMBLER-INTERNAL-LOGIC-ERROR!
3618 An internal assembler logic error has been found. This means there is a
3619 bug in the assembler.
3620
3621 @cindex expr (internal section)
3622 @item expr section
3623 The assembler stores complex expression internally as combinations of
3624 symbols. When it needs to represent an expression as a symbol, it puts
3625 it in the expr section.
3626 @c FIXME item debug
3627 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector preload
3628 @c FIXME item transfer[t] vector postload
3629 @c FIXME item register
3630 @end table
3631
3632 @node Sub-Sections
3633 @section Sub-Sections
3634
3635 @cindex numbered subsections
3636 @cindex grouping data
3637 @ifset aout
3638 Assembled bytes
3639 @ifset COFF-ELF
3640 conventionally
3641 @end ifset
3642 fall into two sections: text and data.
3643 @end ifset
3644 You may have separate groups of
3645 @ifset GENERIC
3646 data in named sections
3647 @end ifset
3648 @ifclear GENERIC
3649 @ifclear aout
3650 data in named sections
3651 @end ifclear
3652 @ifset aout
3653 text or data
3654 @end ifset
3655 @end ifclear
3656 that you want to end up near to each other in the object file, even though they
3657 are not contiguous in the assembler source. @command{@value{AS}} allows you to
3658 use @dfn{subsections} for this purpose. Within each section, there can be
3659 numbered subsections with values from 0 to 8192. Objects assembled into the
3660 same subsection go into the object file together with other objects in the same
3661 subsection. For example, a compiler might want to store constants in the text
3662 section, but might not want to have them interspersed with the program being
3663 assembled. In this case, the compiler could issue a @samp{.text 0} before each
3664 section of code being output, and a @samp{.text 1} before each group of
3665 constants being output.
3666
3667 Subsections are optional. If you do not use subsections, everything
3668 goes in subsection number zero.
3669
3670 @ifset GENERIC
3671 Each subsection is zero-padded up to a multiple of four bytes.
3672 (Subsections may be padded a different amount on different flavors
3673 of @command{@value{AS}}.)
3674 @end ifset
3675 @ifclear GENERIC
3676 @ifset H8
3677 On the H8/300 platform, each subsection is zero-padded to a word
3678 boundary (two bytes).
3679 The same is true on the Renesas SH.
3680 @end ifset
3681 @end ifclear
3682
3683 Subsections appear in your object file in numeric order, lowest numbered
3684 to highest. (All this to be compatible with other people's assemblers.)
3685 The object file contains no representation of subsections; @code{@value{LD}} and
3686 other programs that manipulate object files see no trace of them.
3687 They just see all your text subsections as a text section, and all your
3688 data subsections as a data section.
3689
3690 To specify which subsection you want subsequent statements assembled
3691 into, use a numeric argument to specify it, in a @samp{.text
3692 @var{expression}} or a @samp{.data @var{expression}} statement.
3693 @ifset COFF
3694 @ifset GENERIC
3695 When generating COFF output, you
3696 @end ifset
3697 @ifclear GENERIC
3698 You
3699 @end ifclear
3700 can also use an extra subsection
3701 argument with arbitrary named sections: @samp{.section @var{name},
3702 @var{expression}}.
3703 @end ifset
3704 @ifset ELF
3705 @ifset GENERIC
3706 When generating ELF output, you
3707 @end ifset
3708 @ifclear GENERIC
3709 You
3710 @end ifclear
3711 can also use the @code{.subsection} directive (@pxref{SubSection})
3712 to specify a subsection: @samp{.subsection @var{expression}}.
3713 @end ifset
3714 @var{Expression} should be an absolute expression
3715 (@pxref{Expressions}). If you just say @samp{.text} then @samp{.text 0}
3716 is assumed. Likewise @samp{.data} means @samp{.data 0}. Assembly
3717 begins in @code{text 0}. For instance:
3718 @smallexample
3719 .text 0 # The default subsection is text 0 anyway.
3720 .ascii "This lives in the first text subsection. *"
3721 .text 1
3722 .ascii "But this lives in the second text subsection."
3723 .data 0
3724 .ascii "This lives in the data section,"
3725 .ascii "in the first data subsection."
3726 .text 0
3727 .ascii "This lives in the first text section,"
3728 .ascii "immediately following the asterisk (*)."
3729 @end smallexample
3730
3731 Each section has a @dfn{location counter} incremented by one for every byte
3732 assembled into that section. Because subsections are merely a convenience
3733 restricted to @command{@value{AS}} there is no concept of a subsection location
3734 counter. There is no way to directly manipulate a location counter---but the
3735 @code{.align} directive changes it, and any label definition captures its
3736 current value. The location counter of the section where statements are being
3737 assembled is said to be the @dfn{active} location counter.
3738
3739 @node bss
3740 @section bss Section
3741
3742 @cindex bss section
3743 @cindex common variable storage
3744 The bss section is used for local common variable storage.
3745 You may allocate address space in the bss section, but you may
3746 not dictate data to load into it before your program executes. When
3747 your program starts running, all the contents of the bss
3748 section are zeroed bytes.
3749
3750 The @code{.lcomm} pseudo-op defines a symbol in the bss section; see
3751 @ref{Lcomm,,@code{.lcomm}}.
3752
3753 The @code{.comm} pseudo-op may be used to declare a common symbol, which is
3754 another form of uninitialized symbol; see @ref{Comm,,@code{.comm}}.
3755
3756 @ifset GENERIC
3757 When assembling for a target which supports multiple sections, such as ELF or
3758 COFF, you may switch into the @code{.bss} section and define symbols as usual;
3759 see @ref{Section,,@code{.section}}. You may only assemble zero values into the
3760 section. Typically the section will only contain symbol definitions and
3761 @code{.skip} directives (@pxref{Skip,,@code{.skip}}).
3762 @end ifset
3763
3764 @node Symbols
3765 @chapter Symbols
3766
3767 @cindex symbols
3768 Symbols are a central concept: the programmer uses symbols to name
3769 things, the linker uses symbols to link, and the debugger uses symbols
3770 to debug.
3771
3772 @quotation
3773 @cindex debuggers, and symbol order
3774 @emph{Warning:} @command{@value{AS}} does not place symbols in the object file in
3775 the same order they were declared. This may break some debuggers.
3776 @end quotation
3777
3778 @menu
3779 * Labels:: Labels
3780 * Setting Symbols:: Giving Symbols Other Values
3781 * Symbol Names:: Symbol Names
3782 * Dot:: The Special Dot Symbol
3783 * Symbol Attributes:: Symbol Attributes
3784 @end menu
3785
3786 @node Labels
3787 @section Labels
3788
3789 @cindex labels
3790 A @dfn{label} is written as a symbol immediately followed by a colon
3791 @samp{:}. The symbol then represents the current value of the
3792 active location counter, and is, for example, a suitable instruction
3793 operand. You are warned if you use the same symbol to represent two
3794 different locations: the first definition overrides any other
3795 definitions.
3796
3797 @ifset HPPA
3798 On the HPPA, the usual form for a label need not be immediately followed by a
3799 colon, but instead must start in column zero. Only one label may be defined on
3800 a single line. To work around this, the HPPA version of @command{@value{AS}} also
3801 provides a special directive @code{.label} for defining labels more flexibly.
3802 @end ifset
3803
3804 @node Setting Symbols
3805 @section Giving Symbols Other Values
3806
3807 @cindex assigning values to symbols
3808 @cindex symbol values, assigning
3809 A symbol can be given an arbitrary value by writing a symbol, followed
3810 by an equals sign @samp{=}, followed by an expression
3811 (@pxref{Expressions}). This is equivalent to using the @code{.set}
3812 directive. @xref{Set,,@code{.set}}. In the same way, using a double
3813 equals sign @samp{=}@samp{=} here represents an equivalent of the
3814 @code{.eqv} directive. @xref{Eqv,,@code{.eqv}}.
3815
3816 @ifset Blackfin
3817 Blackfin does not support symbol assignment with @samp{=}.
3818 @end ifset
3819
3820 @node Symbol Names
3821 @section Symbol Names
3822
3823 @cindex symbol names
3824 @cindex names, symbol
3825 @ifclear SPECIAL-SYMS
3826 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On most
3827 machines, you can also use @code{$} in symbol names; exceptions are
3828 noted in @ref{Machine Dependencies}. That character may be followed by any
3829 string of digits, letters, dollar signs (unless otherwise noted for a
3830 particular target machine), and underscores.
3831 @end ifclear
3832 @ifset SPECIAL-SYMS
3833 @ifset H8
3834 Symbol names begin with a letter or with one of @samp{._}. On the
3835 Renesas SH you can also use @code{$} in symbol names. That
3836 character may be followed by any string of digits, letters, dollar signs (save
3837 on the H8/300), and underscores.
3838 @end ifset
3839 @end ifset
3840
3841 Case of letters is significant: @code{foo} is a different symbol name
3842 than @code{Foo}.
3843
3844 Symbol names do not start with a digit. An exception to this rule is made for
3845 Local Labels. See below.
3846
3847 Multibyte characters are supported. To generate a symbol name containing
3848 multibyte characters enclose it within double quotes and use escape codes. cf
3849 @xref{Strings}. Generating a multibyte symbol name from a label is not
3850 currently supported.
3851
3852 Each symbol has exactly one name. Each name in an assembly language program
3853 refers to exactly one symbol. You may use that symbol name any number of times
3854 in a program.
3855
3856 @subheading Local Symbol Names
3857
3858 @cindex local symbol names
3859 @cindex symbol names, local
3860 A local symbol is any symbol beginning with certain local label prefixes.
3861 By default, the local label prefix is @samp{.L} for ELF systems or
3862 @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems, but each target may have its own
3863 set of local label prefixes.
3864 @ifset HPPA
3865 On the HPPA local symbols begin with @samp{L$}.
3866 @end ifset
3867
3868 Local symbols are defined and used within the assembler, but they are
3869 normally not saved in object files. Thus, they are not visible when debugging.
3870 You may use the @samp{-L} option (@pxref{L, ,Include Local Symbols})
3871 to retain the local symbols in the object files.
3872
3873 @subheading Local Labels
3874
3875 @cindex local labels
3876 @cindex temporary symbol names
3877 @cindex symbol names, temporary
3878 Local labels are different from local symbols. Local labels help compilers and
3879 programmers use names temporarily. They create symbols which are guaranteed to
3880 be unique over the entire scope of the input source code and which can be
3881 referred to by a simple notation. To define a local label, write a label of
3882 the form @samp{@b{N}:} (where @b{N} represents any non-negative integer).
3883 To refer to the most recent previous definition of that label write
3884 @samp{@b{N}b}, using the same number as when you defined the label. To refer
3885 to the next definition of a local label, write @samp{@b{N}f}. The @samp{b}
3886 stands for ``backwards'' and the @samp{f} stands for ``forwards''.
3887
3888 There is no restriction on how you can use these labels, and you can reuse them
3889 too. So that it is possible to repeatedly define the same local label (using
3890 the same number @samp{@b{N}}), although you can only refer to the most recently
3891 defined local label of that number (for a backwards reference) or the next
3892 definition of a specific local label for a forward reference. It is also worth
3893 noting that the first 10 local labels (@samp{@b{0:}}@dots{}@samp{@b{9:}}) are
3894 implemented in a slightly more efficient manner than the others.
3895
3896 Here is an example:
3897
3898 @smallexample
3899 1: branch 1f
3900 2: branch 1b
3901 1: branch 2f
3902 2: branch 1b
3903 @end smallexample
3904
3905 Which is the equivalent of:
3906
3907 @smallexample
3908 label_1: branch label_3
3909 label_2: branch label_1
3910 label_3: branch label_4
3911 label_4: branch label_3
3912 @end smallexample
3913
3914 Local label names are only a notational device. They are immediately
3915 transformed into more conventional symbol names before the assembler uses them.
3916 The symbol names are stored in the symbol table, appear in error messages, and
3917 are optionally emitted to the object file. The names are constructed using
3918 these parts:
3919
3920 @table @code
3921 @item @emph{local label prefix}
3922 All local symbols begin with the system-specific local label prefix.
3923 Normally both @command{@value{AS}} and @code{@value{LD}} forget symbols
3924 that start with the local label prefix. These labels are
3925 used for symbols you are never intended to see. If you use the
3926 @samp{-L} option then @command{@value{AS}} retains these symbols in the
3927 object file. If you also instruct @code{@value{LD}} to retain these symbols,
3928 you may use them in debugging.
3929
3930 @item @var{number}
3931 This is the number that was used in the local label definition. So if the
3932 label is written @samp{55:} then the number is @samp{55}.
3933
3934 @item @kbd{C-B}
3935 This unusual character is included so you do not accidentally invent a symbol
3936 of the same name. The character has ASCII value of @samp{\002} (control-B).
3937
3938 @item @emph{ordinal number}
3939 This is a serial number to keep the labels distinct. The first definition of
3940 @samp{0:} gets the number @samp{1}. The 15th definition of @samp{0:} gets the
3941 number @samp{15}, and so on. Likewise the first definition of @samp{1:} gets
3942 the number @samp{1} and its 15th definition gets @samp{15} as well.
3943 @end table
3944
3945 So for example, the first @code{1:} may be named @code{.L1@kbd{C-B}1}, and
3946 the 44th @code{3:} may be named @code{.L3@kbd{C-B}44}.
3947
3948 @subheading Dollar Local Labels
3949 @cindex dollar local symbols
3950
3951 On some targets @code{@value{AS}} also supports an even more local form of
3952 local labels called dollar labels. These labels go out of scope (i.e., they
3953 become undefined) as soon as a non-local label is defined. Thus they remain
3954 valid for only a small region of the input source code. Normal local labels,
3955 by contrast, remain in scope for the entire file, or until they are redefined
3956 by another occurrence of the same local label.
3957
3958 Dollar labels are defined in exactly the same way as ordinary local labels,
3959 except that they have a dollar sign suffix to their numeric value, e.g.,
3960 @samp{@b{55$:}}.
3961
3962 They can also be distinguished from ordinary local labels by their transformed
3963 names which use ASCII character @samp{\001} (control-A) as the magic character
3964 to distinguish them from ordinary labels. For example, the fifth definition of
3965 @samp{6$} may be named @samp{.L6@kbd{C-A}5}.
3966
3967 @node Dot
3968 @section The Special Dot Symbol
3969
3970 @cindex dot (symbol)
3971 @cindex @code{.} (symbol)
3972 @cindex current address
3973 @cindex location counter
3974 The special symbol @samp{.} refers to the current address that
3975 @command{@value{AS}} is assembling into. Thus, the expression @samp{melvin:
3976 .long .} defines @code{melvin} to contain its own address.
3977 Assigning a value to @code{.} is treated the same as a @code{.org}
3978 directive.
3979 @ifclear no-space-dir
3980 Thus, the expression @samp{.=.+4} is the same as saying
3981 @samp{.space 4}.
3982 @end ifclear
3983
3984 @node Symbol Attributes
3985 @section Symbol Attributes
3986
3987 @cindex symbol attributes
3988 @cindex attributes, symbol
3989 Every symbol has, as well as its name, the attributes ``Value'' and
3990 ``Type''. Depending on output format, symbols can also have auxiliary
3991 attributes.
3992 @ifset INTERNALS
3993 The detailed definitions are in @file{a.out.h}.
3994 @end ifset
3995
3996 If you use a symbol without defining it, @command{@value{AS}} assumes zero for
3997 all these attributes, and probably won't warn you. This makes the
3998 symbol an externally defined symbol, which is generally what you
3999 would want.
4000
4001 @menu
4002 * Symbol Value:: Value
4003 * Symbol Type:: Type
4004 @ifset aout
4005 * a.out Symbols:: Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4006 @end ifset
4007 @ifset COFF
4008 * COFF Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for COFF
4009 @end ifset
4010 @ifset SOM
4011 * SOM Symbols:: Symbol Attributes for SOM
4012 @end ifset
4013 @end menu
4014
4015 @node Symbol Value
4016 @subsection Value
4017
4018 @cindex value of a symbol
4019 @cindex symbol value
4020 The value of a symbol is (usually) 32 bits. For a symbol which labels a
4021 location in the text, data, bss or absolute sections the value is the
4022 number of addresses from the start of that section to the label.
4023 Naturally for text, data and bss sections the value of a symbol changes
4024 as @code{@value{LD}} changes section base addresses during linking. Absolute
4025 symbols' values do not change during linking: that is why they are
4026 called absolute.
4027
4028 The value of an undefined symbol is treated in a special way. If it is
4029 0 then the symbol is not defined in this assembler source file, and
4030 @code{@value{LD}} tries to determine its value from other files linked into the
4031 same program. You make this kind of symbol simply by mentioning a symbol
4032 name without defining it. A non-zero value represents a @code{.comm}
4033 common declaration. The value is how much common storage to reserve, in
4034 bytes (addresses). The symbol refers to the first address of the
4035 allocated storage.
4036
4037 @node Symbol Type
4038 @subsection Type
4039
4040 @cindex type of a symbol
4041 @cindex symbol type
4042 The type attribute of a symbol contains relocation (section)
4043 information, any flag settings indicating that a symbol is external, and
4044 (optionally), other information for linkers and debuggers. The exact
4045 format depends on the object-code output format in use.
4046
4047 @ifset aout
4048 @node a.out Symbols
4049 @subsection Symbol Attributes: @code{a.out}
4050
4051 @cindex @code{a.out} symbol attributes
4052 @cindex symbol attributes, @code{a.out}
4053
4054 @menu
4055 * Symbol Desc:: Descriptor
4056 * Symbol Other:: Other
4057 @end menu
4058
4059 @node Symbol Desc
4060 @subsubsection Descriptor
4061
4062 @cindex descriptor, of @code{a.out} symbol
4063 This is an arbitrary 16-bit value. You may establish a symbol's
4064 descriptor value by using a @code{.desc} statement
4065 (@pxref{Desc,,@code{.desc}}). A descriptor value means nothing to
4066 @command{@value{AS}}.
4067
4068 @node Symbol Other
4069 @subsubsection Other
4070
4071 @cindex other attribute, of @code{a.out} symbol
4072 This is an arbitrary 8-bit value. It means nothing to @command{@value{AS}}.
4073 @end ifset
4074
4075 @ifset COFF
4076 @node COFF Symbols
4077 @subsection Symbol Attributes for COFF
4078
4079 @cindex COFF symbol attributes
4080 @cindex symbol attributes, COFF
4081
4082 The COFF format supports a multitude of auxiliary symbol attributes;
4083 like the primary symbol attributes, they are set between @code{.def} and
4084 @code{.endef} directives.
4085
4086 @subsubsection Primary Attributes
4087
4088 @cindex primary attributes, COFF symbols
4089 The symbol name is set with @code{.def}; the value and type,
4090 respectively, with @code{.val} and @code{.type}.
4091
4092 @subsubsection Auxiliary Attributes
4093
4094 @cindex auxiliary attributes, COFF symbols
4095 The @command{@value{AS}} directives @code{.dim}, @code{.line}, @code{.scl},
4096 @code{.size}, @code{.tag}, and @code{.weak} can generate auxiliary symbol
4097 table information for COFF.
4098 @end ifset
4099
4100 @ifset SOM
4101 @node SOM Symbols
4102 @subsection Symbol Attributes for SOM
4103
4104 @cindex SOM symbol attributes
4105 @cindex symbol attributes, SOM
4106
4107 The SOM format for the HPPA supports a multitude of symbol attributes set with
4108 the @code{.EXPORT} and @code{.IMPORT} directives.
4109
4110 The attributes are described in @cite{HP9000 Series 800 Assembly
4111 Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) under the @code{IMPORT} and
4112 @code{EXPORT} assembler directive documentation.
4113 @end ifset
4114
4115 @node Expressions
4116 @chapter Expressions
4117
4118 @cindex expressions
4119 @cindex addresses
4120 @cindex numeric values
4121 An @dfn{expression} specifies an address or numeric value.
4122 Whitespace may precede and/or follow an expression.
4123
4124 The result of an expression must be an absolute number, or else an offset into
4125 a particular section. If an expression is not absolute, and there is not
4126 enough information when @command{@value{AS}} sees the expression to know its
4127 section, a second pass over the source program might be necessary to interpret
4128 the expression---but the second pass is currently not implemented.
4129 @command{@value{AS}} aborts with an error message in this situation.
4130
4131 @menu
4132 * Empty Exprs:: Empty Expressions
4133 * Integer Exprs:: Integer Expressions
4134 @end menu
4135
4136 @node Empty Exprs
4137 @section Empty Expressions
4138
4139 @cindex empty expressions
4140 @cindex expressions, empty
4141 An empty expression has no value: it is just whitespace or null.
4142 Wherever an absolute expression is required, you may omit the
4143 expression, and @command{@value{AS}} assumes a value of (absolute) 0. This
4144 is compatible with other assemblers.
4145
4146 @node Integer Exprs
4147 @section Integer Expressions
4148
4149 @cindex integer expressions
4150 @cindex expressions, integer
4151 An @dfn{integer expression} is one or more @emph{arguments} delimited
4152 by @emph{operators}.
4153
4154 @menu
4155 * Arguments:: Arguments
4156 * Operators:: Operators
4157 * Prefix Ops:: Prefix Operators
4158 * Infix Ops:: Infix Operators
4159 @end menu
4160
4161 @node Arguments
4162 @subsection Arguments
4163
4164 @cindex expression arguments
4165 @cindex arguments in expressions
4166 @cindex operands in expressions
4167 @cindex arithmetic operands
4168 @dfn{Arguments} are symbols, numbers or subexpressions. In other
4169 contexts arguments are sometimes called ``arithmetic operands''. In
4170 this manual, to avoid confusing them with the ``instruction operands'' of
4171 the machine language, we use the term ``argument'' to refer to parts of
4172 expressions only, reserving the word ``operand'' to refer only to machine
4173 instruction operands.
4174
4175 Symbols are evaluated to yield @{@var{section} @var{NNN}@} where
4176 @var{section} is one of text, data, bss, absolute,
4177 or undefined. @var{NNN} is a signed, 2's complement 32 bit
4178 integer.
4179
4180 Numbers are usually integers.
4181
4182 A number can be a flonum or bignum. In this case, you are warned
4183 that only the low order 32 bits are used, and @command{@value{AS}} pretends
4184 these 32 bits are an integer. You may write integer-manipulating
4185 instructions that act on exotic constants, compatible with other
4186 assemblers.
4187
4188 @cindex subexpressions
4189 Subexpressions are a left parenthesis @samp{(} followed by an integer
4190 expression, followed by a right parenthesis @samp{)}; or a prefix
4191 operator followed by an argument.
4192
4193 @node Operators
4194 @subsection Operators
4195
4196 @cindex operators, in expressions
4197 @cindex arithmetic functions
4198 @cindex functions, in expressions
4199 @dfn{Operators} are arithmetic functions, like @code{+} or @code{%}. Prefix
4200 operators are followed by an argument. Infix operators appear
4201 between their arguments. Operators may be preceded and/or followed by
4202 whitespace.
4203
4204 @node Prefix Ops
4205 @subsection Prefix Operator
4206
4207 @cindex prefix operators
4208 @command{@value{AS}} has the following @dfn{prefix operators}. They each take
4209 one argument, which must be absolute.
4210
4211 @c the tex/end tex stuff surrounding this small table is meant to make
4212 @c it align, on the printed page, with the similar table in the next
4213 @c section (which is inside an enumerate).
4214 @tex
4215 \global\advance\leftskip by \itemindent
4216 @end tex
4217
4218 @table @code
4219 @item -
4220 @dfn{Negation}. Two's complement negation.
4221 @item ~
4222 @dfn{Complementation}. Bitwise not.
4223 @end table
4224
4225 @tex
4226 \global\advance\leftskip by -\itemindent
4227 @end tex
4228
4229 @node Infix Ops
4230 @subsection Infix Operators
4231
4232 @cindex infix operators
4233 @cindex operators, permitted arguments
4234 @dfn{Infix operators} take two arguments, one on either side. Operators
4235 have precedence, but operations with equal precedence are performed left
4236 to right. Apart from @code{+} or @option{-}, both arguments must be
4237 absolute, and the result is absolute.
4238
4239 @enumerate
4240 @cindex operator precedence
4241 @cindex precedence of operators
4242
4243 @item
4244 Highest Precedence
4245
4246 @table @code
4247 @item *
4248 @dfn{Multiplication}.
4249
4250 @item /
4251 @dfn{Division}. Truncation is the same as the C operator @samp{/}
4252
4253 @item %
4254 @dfn{Remainder}.
4255
4256 @item <<
4257 @dfn{Shift Left}. Same as the C operator @samp{<<}.
4258
4259 @item >>
4260 @dfn{Shift Right}. Same as the C operator @samp{>>}.
4261 @end table
4262
4263 @item
4264 Intermediate precedence
4265
4266 @table @code
4267 @item |
4268
4269 @dfn{Bitwise Inclusive Or}.
4270
4271 @item &
4272 @dfn{Bitwise And}.
4273
4274 @item ^
4275 @dfn{Bitwise Exclusive Or}.
4276
4277 @item !
4278 @dfn{Bitwise Or Not}.
4279 @end table
4280
4281 @item
4282 Low Precedence
4283
4284 @table @code
4285 @cindex addition, permitted arguments
4286 @cindex plus, permitted arguments
4287 @cindex arguments for addition
4288 @item +
4289 @dfn{Addition}. If either argument is absolute, the result has the section of
4290 the other argument. You may not add together arguments from different
4291 sections.
4292
4293 @cindex subtraction, permitted arguments
4294 @cindex minus, permitted arguments
4295 @cindex arguments for subtraction
4296 @item -
4297 @dfn{Subtraction}. If the right argument is absolute, the
4298 result has the section of the left argument.
4299 If both arguments are in the same section, the result is absolute.
4300 You may not subtract arguments from different sections.
4301 @c FIXME is there still something useful to say about undefined - undefined ?
4302
4303 @cindex comparison expressions
4304 @cindex expressions, comparison
4305 @item ==
4306 @dfn{Is Equal To}
4307 @item <>
4308 @itemx !=
4309 @dfn{Is Not Equal To}
4310 @item <
4311 @dfn{Is Less Than}
4312 @item >
4313 @dfn{Is Greater Than}
4314 @item >=
4315 @dfn{Is Greater Than Or Equal To}
4316 @item <=
4317 @dfn{Is Less Than Or Equal To}
4318
4319 The comparison operators can be used as infix operators. A true results has a
4320 value of -1 whereas a false result has a value of 0. Note, these operators
4321 perform signed comparisons.
4322 @end table
4323
4324 @item Lowest Precedence
4325
4326 @table @code
4327 @item &&
4328 @dfn{Logical And}.
4329
4330 @item ||
4331 @dfn{Logical Or}.
4332
4333 These two logical operations can be used to combine the results of sub
4334 expressions. Note, unlike the comparison operators a true result returns a
4335 value of 1 but a false results does still return 0. Also note that the logical
4336 or operator has a slightly lower precedence than logical and.
4337
4338 @end table
4339 @end enumerate
4340
4341 In short, it's only meaningful to add or subtract the @emph{offsets} in an
4342 address; you can only have a defined section in one of the two arguments.
4343
4344 @node Pseudo Ops
4345 @chapter Assembler Directives
4346
4347 @cindex directives, machine independent
4348 @cindex pseudo-ops, machine independent
4349 @cindex machine independent directives
4350 All assembler directives have names that begin with a period (@samp{.}).
4351 The names are case insensitive for most targets, and usually written
4352 in lower case.
4353
4354 This chapter discusses directives that are available regardless of the
4355 target machine configuration for the @sc{gnu} assembler.
4356 @ifset GENERIC
4357 Some machine configurations provide additional directives.
4358 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
4359 @end ifset
4360 @ifclear GENERIC
4361 @ifset machine-directives
4362 @xref{Machine Dependencies}, for additional directives.
4363 @end ifset
4364 @end ifclear
4365
4366 @menu
4367 * Abort:: @code{.abort}
4368 @ifset COFF
4369 * ABORT (COFF):: @code{.ABORT}
4370 @end ifset
4371
4372 * Align:: @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4373 * Altmacro:: @code{.altmacro}
4374 * Ascii:: @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4375 * Asciz:: @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4376 * Balign:: @code{.balign [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]}
4377 * Bundle directives:: @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}, etc
4378 * Byte:: @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4379 * CFI directives:: @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}, @code{.cfi_endproc}, etc.
4380 * Comm:: @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4381 * Data:: @code{.data @var{subsection}}
4382 * Dc:: @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
4383 * Dcb:: @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4384 * Ds:: @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
4385 @ifset COFF
4386 * Def:: @code{.def @var{name}}
4387 @end ifset
4388 @ifset aout
4389 * Desc:: @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
4390 @end ifset
4391 @ifset COFF
4392 * Dim:: @code{.dim}
4393 @end ifset
4394
4395 * Double:: @code{.double @var{flonums}}
4396 * Eject:: @code{.eject}
4397 * Else:: @code{.else}
4398 * Elseif:: @code{.elseif}
4399 * End:: @code{.end}
4400 @ifset COFF
4401 * Endef:: @code{.endef}
4402 @end ifset
4403
4404 * Endfunc:: @code{.endfunc}
4405 * Endif:: @code{.endif}
4406 * Equ:: @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4407 * Equiv:: @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4408 * Eqv:: @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4409 * Err:: @code{.err}
4410 * Error:: @code{.error @var{string}}
4411 * Exitm:: @code{.exitm}
4412 * Extern:: @code{.extern}
4413 * Fail:: @code{.fail}
4414 * File:: @code{.file}
4415 * Fill:: @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
4416 * Float:: @code{.float @var{flonums}}
4417 * Func:: @code{.func}
4418 * Global:: @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
4419 @ifset ELF
4420 * Gnu_attribute:: @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
4421 * Hidden:: @code{.hidden @var{names}}
4422 @end ifset
4423
4424 * hword:: @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
4425 * Ident:: @code{.ident}
4426 * If:: @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
4427 * Incbin:: @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
4428 * Include:: @code{.include "@var{file}"}
4429 * Int:: @code{.int @var{expressions}}
4430 @ifset ELF
4431 * Internal:: @code{.internal @var{names}}
4432 @end ifset
4433
4434 * Irp:: @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4435 * Irpc:: @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
4436 * Lcomm:: @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
4437 * Lflags:: @code{.lflags}
4438 @ifclear no-line-dir
4439 * Line:: @code{.line @var{line-number}}
4440 @end ifclear
4441
4442 * Linkonce:: @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
4443 * List:: @code{.list}
4444 * Ln:: @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
4445 * Loc:: @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno}}
4446 * Loc_mark_labels:: @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
4447 @ifset ELF
4448 * Local:: @code{.local @var{names}}
4449 @end ifset
4450
4451 * Long:: @code{.long @var{expressions}}
4452 @ignore
4453 * Lsym:: @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4454 @end ignore
4455
4456 * Macro:: @code{.macro @var{name} @var{args}}@dots{}
4457 * MRI:: @code{.mri @var{val}}
4458 * Noaltmacro:: @code{.noaltmacro}
4459 * Nolist:: @code{.nolist}
4460 * Nops:: @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
4461 * Octa:: @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
4462 * Offset:: @code{.offset @var{loc}}
4463 * Org:: @code{.org @var{new-lc}, @var{fill}}
4464 * P2align:: @code{.p2align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4465 @ifset ELF
4466 * PopSection:: @code{.popsection}
4467 * Previous:: @code{.previous}
4468 @end ifset
4469
4470 * Print:: @code{.print @var{string}}
4471 @ifset ELF
4472 * Protected:: @code{.protected @var{names}}
4473 @end ifset
4474
4475 * Psize:: @code{.psize @var{lines}, @var{columns}}
4476 * Purgem:: @code{.purgem @var{name}}
4477 @ifset ELF
4478 * PushSection:: @code{.pushsection @var{name}}
4479 @end ifset
4480
4481 * Quad:: @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
4482 * Reloc:: @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
4483 * Rept:: @code{.rept @var{count}}
4484 * Sbttl:: @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
4485 @ifset COFF
4486 * Scl:: @code{.scl @var{class}}
4487 @end ifset
4488 @ifset COFF-ELF
4489 * Section:: @code{.section @var{name}[, @var{flags}]}
4490 @end ifset
4491
4492 * Set:: @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
4493 * Short:: @code{.short @var{expressions}}
4494 * Single:: @code{.single @var{flonums}}
4495 @ifset COFF-ELF
4496 * Size:: @code{.size [@var{name} , @var{expression}]}
4497 @end ifset
4498 @ifclear no-space-dir
4499 * Skip:: @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4500 @end ifclear
4501
4502 * Sleb128:: @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
4503 @ifclear no-space-dir
4504 * Space:: @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
4505 @end ifclear
4506 @ifset have-stabs
4507 * Stab:: @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
4508 @end ifset
4509
4510 * String:: @code{.string "@var{str}"}, @code{.string8 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string16 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string32 "@var{str}"}, @code{.string64 "@var{str}"}
4511 * Struct:: @code{.struct @var{expression}}
4512 @ifset ELF
4513 * SubSection:: @code{.subsection}
4514 * Symver:: @code{.symver @var{name},@var{name2@@nodename}[,@var{visibility}]}
4515 @end ifset
4516
4517 @ifset COFF
4518 * Tag:: @code{.tag @var{structname}}
4519 @end ifset
4520
4521 * Text:: @code{.text @var{subsection}}
4522 * Title:: @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
4523 @ifset COFF-ELF
4524 * Type:: @code{.type <@var{int} | @var{name} , @var{type description}>}
4525 @end ifset
4526
4527 * Uleb128:: @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
4528 @ifset COFF
4529 * Val:: @code{.val @var{addr}}
4530 @end ifset
4531
4532 @ifset ELF
4533 * Version:: @code{.version "@var{string}"}
4534 * VTableEntry:: @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
4535 * VTableInherit:: @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
4536 @end ifset
4537
4538 * Warning:: @code{.warning @var{string}}
4539 * Weak:: @code{.weak @var{names}}
4540 * Weakref:: @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{symbol}}
4541 * Word:: @code{.word @var{expressions}}
4542 @ifclear no-space-dir
4543 * Zero:: @code{.zero @var{size}}
4544 @end ifclear
4545 @ifset ELF
4546 * 2byte:: @code{.2byte @var{expressions}}
4547 * 4byte:: @code{.4byte @var{expressions}}
4548 * 8byte:: @code{.8byte @var{bignums}}
4549 @end ifset
4550 * Deprecated:: Deprecated Directives
4551 @end menu
4552
4553 @node Abort
4554 @section @code{.abort}
4555
4556 @cindex @code{abort} directive
4557 @cindex stopping the assembly
4558 This directive stops the assembly immediately. It is for
4559 compatibility with other assemblers. The original idea was that the
4560 assembly language source would be piped into the assembler. If the sender
4561 of the source quit, it could use this directive tells @command{@value{AS}} to
4562 quit also. One day @code{.abort} will not be supported.
4563
4564 @ifset COFF
4565 @node ABORT (COFF)
4566 @section @code{.ABORT} (COFF)
4567
4568 @cindex @code{ABORT} directive
4569 When producing COFF output, @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive as a
4570 synonym for @samp{.abort}.
4571
4572 @end ifset
4573
4574 @node Align
4575 @section @code{.align [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4576
4577 @cindex padding the location counter
4578 @cindex @code{align} directive
4579 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular storage
4580 boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the alignment
4581 required, as described below. If this expression is omitted then a default
4582 value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4583
4584 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4585 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4586 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4587 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4588 with no-op instructions.
4589
4590 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4591 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4592 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4593 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4594 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4595 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4596 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4597
4598 The way the required alignment is specified varies from system to system.
4599 For the arc, hppa, i386 using ELF, iq2000, m68k, or1k,
4600 s390, sparc, tic4x and xtensa, the first expression is the
4601 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.align 8} advances
4602 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4603 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. For the tic54x, the
4604 first expression is the alignment request in words.
4605
4606 For other systems, including ppc, i386 using a.out format, arm and
4607 strongarm, it is the
4608 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
4609 advancement. For example @samp{.align 3} advances the location
4610 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
4611 multiple of 8, no change is needed.
4612
4613 This inconsistency is due to the different behaviors of the various
4614 native assemblers for these systems which GAS must emulate.
4615 GAS also provides @code{.balign} and @code{.p2align} directives,
4616 described later, which have a consistent behavior across all
4617 architectures (but are specific to GAS).
4618
4619 @node Altmacro
4620 @section @code{.altmacro}
4621 Enable alternate macro mode, enabling:
4622
4623 @ftable @code
4624 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
4625 One additional directive, @code{LOCAL}, is available. It is used to
4626 generate a string replacement for each of the @var{name} arguments, and
4627 replace any instances of @var{name} in each macro expansion. The
4628 replacement string is unique in the assembly, and different for each
4629 separate macro expansion. @code{LOCAL} allows you to write macros that
4630 define symbols, without fear of conflict between separate macro expansions.
4631
4632 @item String delimiters
4633 You can write strings delimited in these other ways besides
4634 @code{"@var{string}"}:
4635
4636 @table @code
4637 @item '@var{string}'
4638 You can delimit strings with single-quote characters.
4639
4640 @item <@var{string}>
4641 You can delimit strings with matching angle brackets.
4642 @end table
4643
4644 @item single-character string escape
4645 To include any single character literally in a string (even if the
4646 character would otherwise have some special meaning), you can prefix the
4647 character with @samp{!} (an exclamation mark). For example, you can
4648 write @samp{<4.3 !> 5.4!!>} to get the literal text @samp{4.3 > 5.4!}.
4649
4650 @item Expression results as strings
4651 You can write @samp{%@var{expr}} to evaluate the expression @var{expr}
4652 and use the result as a string.
4653 @end ftable
4654
4655 @node Ascii
4656 @section @code{.ascii "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4657
4658 @cindex @code{ascii} directive
4659 @cindex string literals
4660 @code{.ascii} expects zero or more string literals (@pxref{Strings})
4661 separated by commas. It assembles each string (with no automatic
4662 trailing zero byte) into consecutive addresses.
4663
4664 @node Asciz
4665 @section @code{.asciz "@var{string}"}@dots{}
4666
4667 @cindex @code{asciz} directive
4668 @cindex zero-terminated strings
4669 @cindex null-terminated strings
4670 @code{.asciz} is just like @code{.ascii}, but each string is followed by
4671 a zero byte. The ``z'' in @samp{.asciz} stands for ``zero''.
4672
4673 @node Balign
4674 @section @code{.balign[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
4675
4676 @cindex padding the location counter given number of bytes
4677 @cindex @code{balign} directive
4678 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
4679 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
4680 alignment request in bytes. For example @samp{.balign 8} advances
4681 the location counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter
4682 is already a multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted
4683 then a default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
4684
4685 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
4686 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
4687 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
4688 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
4689 with no-op instructions.
4690
4691 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
4692 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
4693 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
4694 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
4695 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
4696 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
4697 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
4698
4699 @cindex @code{balignw} directive
4700 @cindex @code{balignl} directive
4701 The @code{.balignw} and @code{.balignl} directives are variants of the
4702 @code{.balign} directive. The @code{.balignw} directive treats the fill
4703 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.balignl} directives treats the
4704 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.balignw
4705 4,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
4706 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
4707 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
4708 undefined.
4709
4710 @node Bundle directives
4711 @section Bundle directives
4712 @subsection @code{.bundle_align_mode @var{abs-expr}}
4713 @cindex @code{bundle_align_mode} directive
4714 @cindex bundle
4715 @cindex instruction bundle
4716 @cindex aligned instruction bundle
4717 @code{.bundle_align_mode} enables or disables @dfn{aligned instruction
4718 bundle} mode. In this mode, sequences of adjacent instructions are grouped
4719 into fixed-sized @dfn{bundles}. If the argument is zero, this mode is
4720 disabled (which is the default state). If the argument it not zero, it
4721 gives the size of an instruction bundle as a power of two (as for the
4722 @code{.p2align} directive, @pxref{P2align}).
4723
4724 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that no instruction may span a
4725 certain aligned boundary. A @dfn{bundle} is simply a sequence of
4726 instructions that starts on an aligned boundary. For example, if
4727 @var{abs-expr} is @code{5} then the bundle size is 32, so each aligned
4728 chunk of 32 bytes is a bundle. When aligned instruction bundle mode is in
4729 effect, no single instruction may span a boundary between bundles. If an
4730 instruction would start too close to the end of a bundle for the length of
4731 that particular instruction to fit within the bundle, then the space at the
4732 end of that bundle is filled with no-op instructions so the instruction
4733 starts in the next bundle. As a corollary, it's an error if any single
4734 instruction's encoding is longer than the bundle size.
4735
4736 @subsection @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4737 @cindex @code{bundle_lock} directive
4738 @cindex @code{bundle_unlock} directive
4739 The @code{.bundle_lock} and directive @code{.bundle_unlock} directives
4740 allow explicit control over instruction bundle padding. These directives
4741 are only valid when @code{.bundle_align_mode} has been used to enable
4742 aligned instruction bundle mode. It's an error if they appear when
4743 @code{.bundle_align_mode} has not been used at all, or when the last
4744 directive was @w{@code{.bundle_align_mode 0}}.
4745
4746 @cindex bundle-locked
4747 For some targets, it's an ABI requirement that certain instructions may
4748 appear only as part of specified permissible sequences of multiple
4749 instructions, all within the same bundle. A pair of @code{.bundle_lock}
4750 and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives define a @dfn{bundle-locked}
4751 instruction sequence. For purposes of aligned instruction bundle mode, a
4752 sequence starting with @code{.bundle_lock} and ending with
4753 @code{.bundle_unlock} is treated as a single instruction. That is, the
4754 entire sequence must fit into a single bundle and may not span a bundle
4755 boundary. If necessary, no-op instructions will be inserted before the
4756 first instruction of the sequence so that the whole sequence starts on an
4757 aligned bundle boundary. It's an error if the sequence is longer than the
4758 bundle size.
4759
4760 For convenience when using @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock}
4761 inside assembler macros (@pxref{Macro}), bundle-locked sequences may be
4762 nested. That is, a second @code{.bundle_lock} directive before the next
4763 @code{.bundle_unlock} directive has no effect except that it must be
4764 matched by another closing @code{.bundle_unlock} so that there is the
4765 same number of @code{.bundle_lock} and @code{.bundle_unlock} directives.
4766
4767 @node Byte
4768 @section @code{.byte @var{expressions}}
4769
4770 @cindex @code{byte} directive
4771 @cindex integers, one byte
4772 @code{.byte} expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas.
4773 Each expression is assembled into the next byte.
4774
4775 @node CFI directives
4776 @section CFI directives
4777 @subsection @code{.cfi_sections @var{section_list}}
4778 @cindex @code{cfi_sections} directive
4779 @code{.cfi_sections} may be used to specify whether CFI directives
4780 should emit @code{.eh_frame} section and/or @code{.debug_frame} section.
4781 If @var{section_list} is @code{.eh_frame}, @code{.eh_frame} is emitted,
4782 if @var{section_list} is @code{.debug_frame}, @code{.debug_frame} is emitted.
4783 To emit both use @code{.eh_frame, .debug_frame}. The default if this
4784 directive is not used is @code{.cfi_sections .eh_frame}.
4785
4786 On targets that support compact unwinding tables these can be generated
4787 by specifying @code{.eh_frame_entry} instead of @code{.eh_frame}.
4788
4789 Some targets may support an additional name, such as @code{.c6xabi.exidx}
4790 which is used by the @value{TIC6X} target.
4791
4792 The @code{.cfi_sections} directive can be repeated, with the same or different
4793 arguments, provided that CFI generation has not yet started. Once CFI
4794 generation has started however the section list is fixed and any attempts to
4795 redefine it will result in an error.
4796
4797 @subsection @code{.cfi_startproc [simple]}
4798 @cindex @code{cfi_startproc} directive
4799 @code{.cfi_startproc} is used at the beginning of each function that
4800 should have an entry in @code{.eh_frame}. It initializes some internal
4801 data structures. Don't forget to close the function by
4802 @code{.cfi_endproc}.
4803
4804 Unless @code{.cfi_startproc} is used along with parameter @code{simple}
4805 it also emits some architecture dependent initial CFI instructions.
4806
4807 @subsection @code{.cfi_endproc}
4808 @cindex @code{cfi_endproc} directive
4809 @code{.cfi_endproc} is used at the end of a function where it closes its
4810 unwind entry previously opened by
4811 @code{.cfi_startproc}, and emits it to @code{.eh_frame}.
4812
4813 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4814 @cindex @code{cfi_personality} directive
4815 @code{.cfi_personality} defines personality routine and its encoding.
4816 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the personality
4817 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), second
4818 argument is not present, otherwise second argument should be
4819 a constant or a symbol name. When using indirect encodings,
4820 the symbol provided should be the location where personality
4821 can be loaded from, not the personality routine itself.
4822 The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_personality 0xff},
4823 no personality routine.
4824
4825 @subsection @code{.cfi_personality_id @var{id}}
4826 @cindex @code{cfi_personality_id} directive
4827 @code{cfi_personality_id} defines a personality routine by its index as
4828 defined in a compact unwinding format.
4829 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4830 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4831
4832 @subsection @code{.cfi_fde_data [@var{opcode1} [, @dots{}]]}
4833 @cindex @code{cfi_fde_data} directive
4834 @code{cfi_fde_data} is used to describe the compact unwind opcodes to be
4835 used for the current function. These are emitted inline in the
4836 @code{.eh_frame_entry} section if small enough and there is no LSDA, or
4837 in the @code{.gnu.extab} section otherwise.
4838 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4839 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4840
4841 @subsection @code{.cfi_lsda @var{encoding} [, @var{exp}]}
4842 @code{.cfi_lsda} defines LSDA and its encoding.
4843 @var{encoding} must be a constant determining how the LSDA
4844 should be encoded. If it is 255 (@code{DW_EH_PE_omit}), the second
4845 argument is not present, otherwise the second argument should be a constant
4846 or a symbol name. The default after @code{.cfi_startproc} is @code{.cfi_lsda 0xff},
4847 meaning that no LSDA is present.
4848
4849 @subsection @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} [@var{align}]
4850 @code{.cfi_inline_lsda} marks the start of a LSDA data section and
4851 switches to the corresponding @code{.gnu.extab} section.
4852 Must be preceded by a CFI block containing a @code{.cfi_lsda} directive.
4853 Only valid when generating compact EH frames (i.e.
4854 with @code{.cfi_sections eh_frame_entry}.
4855
4856 The table header and unwinding opcodes will be generated at this point,
4857 so that they are immediately followed by the LSDA data. The symbol
4858 referenced by the @code{.cfi_lsda} directive should still be defined
4859 in case a fallback FDE based encoding is used. The LSDA data is terminated
4860 by a section directive.
4861
4862 The optional @var{align} argument specifies the alignment required.
4863 The alignment is specified as a power of two, as with the
4864 @code{.p2align} directive.
4865
4866 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4867 @code{.cfi_def_cfa} defines a rule for computing CFA as: @i{take
4868 address from @var{register} and add @var{offset} to it}.
4869
4870 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register @var{register}}
4871 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_register} modifies a rule for computing CFA. From
4872 now on @var{register} will be used instead of the old one. Offset
4873 remains the same.
4874
4875 @subsection @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4876 @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} modifies a rule for computing CFA. Register
4877 remains the same, but @var{offset} is new. Note that it is the
4878 absolute offset that will be added to a defined register to compute
4879 CFA address.
4880
4881 @subsection @code{.cfi_adjust_cfa_offset @var{offset}}
4882 Same as @code{.cfi_def_cfa_offset} but @var{offset} is a relative
4883 value that is added/subtracted from the previous offset.
4884
4885 @subsection @code{.cfi_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4886 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4887 CFA.
4888
4889 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4890 Previous value of @var{register} is CFA + @var{offset}.
4891
4892 @subsection @code{.cfi_rel_offset @var{register}, @var{offset}}
4893 Previous value of @var{register} is saved at offset @var{offset} from
4894 the current CFA register. This is transformed to @code{.cfi_offset}
4895 using the known displacement of the CFA register from the CFA.
4896 This is often easier to use, because the number will match the
4897 code it's annotating.
4898
4899 @subsection @code{.cfi_register @var{register1}, @var{register2}}
4900 Previous value of @var{register1} is saved in register @var{register2}.
4901
4902 @subsection @code{.cfi_restore @var{register}}
4903 @code{.cfi_restore} says that the rule for @var{register} is now the
4904 same as it was at the beginning of the function, after all initial
4905 instruction added by @code{.cfi_startproc} were executed.
4906
4907 @subsection @code{.cfi_undefined @var{register}}
4908 From now on the previous value of @var{register} can't be restored anymore.
4909
4910 @subsection @code{.cfi_same_value @var{register}}
4911 Current value of @var{register} is the same like in the previous frame,
4912 i.e. no restoration needed.
4913
4914 @subsection @code{.cfi_remember_state} and @code{.cfi_restore_state}
4915 @code{.cfi_remember_state} pushes the set of rules for every register onto an
4916 implicit stack, while @code{.cfi_restore_state} pops them off the stack and
4917 places them in the current row. This is useful for situations where you have
4918 multiple @code{.cfi_*} directives that need to be undone due to the control
4919 flow of the program. For example, we could have something like this (assuming
4920 the CFA is the value of @code{rbp}):
4921
4922 @smallexample
4923 je label
4924 popq %rbx
4925 .cfi_restore %rbx
4926 popq %r12
4927 .cfi_restore %r12
4928 popq %rbp
4929 .cfi_restore %rbp
4930 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4931 ret
4932 label:
4933 /* Do something else */
4934 @end smallexample
4935
4936 Here, we want the @code{.cfi} directives to affect only the rows corresponding
4937 to the instructions before @code{label}. This means we'd have to add multiple
4938 @code{.cfi} directives after @code{label} to recreate the original save
4939 locations of the registers, as well as setting the CFA back to the value of
4940 @code{rbp}. This would be clumsy, and result in a larger binary size. Instead,
4941 we can write:
4942
4943 @smallexample
4944 je label
4945 popq %rbx
4946 .cfi_remember_state
4947 .cfi_restore %rbx
4948 popq %r12
4949 .cfi_restore %r12
4950 popq %rbp
4951 .cfi_restore %rbp
4952 .cfi_def_cfa %rsp, 8
4953 ret
4954 label:
4955 .cfi_restore_state
4956 /* Do something else */
4957 @end smallexample
4958
4959 That way, the rules for the instructions after @code{label} will be the same
4960 as before the first @code{.cfi_restore} without having to use multiple
4961 @code{.cfi} directives.
4962
4963 @subsection @code{.cfi_return_column @var{register}}
4964 Change return column @var{register}, i.e. the return address is either
4965 directly in @var{register} or can be accessed by rules for @var{register}.
4966
4967 @subsection @code{.cfi_signal_frame}
4968 Mark current function as signal trampoline.
4969
4970 @subsection @code{.cfi_window_save}
4971 SPARC register window has been saved.
4972
4973 @subsection @code{.cfi_escape} @var{expression}[, @dots{}]
4974 Allows the user to add arbitrary bytes to the unwind info. One
4975 might use this to add OS-specific CFI opcodes, or generic CFI
4976 opcodes that GAS does not yet support.
4977
4978 @subsection @code{.cfi_val_encoded_addr @var{register}, @var{encoding}, @var{label}}
4979 The current value of @var{register} is @var{label}. The value of @var{label}
4980 will be encoded in the output file according to @var{encoding}; see the
4981 description of @code{.cfi_personality} for details on this encoding.
4982
4983 The usefulness of equating a register to a fixed label is probably
4984 limited to the return address register. Here, it can be useful to
4985 mark a code segment that has only one return address which is reached
4986 by a direct branch and no copy of the return address exists in memory
4987 or another register.
4988
4989 @node Comm
4990 @section @code{.comm @var{symbol} , @var{length} }
4991
4992 @cindex @code{comm} directive
4993 @cindex symbol, common
4994 @code{.comm} declares a common symbol named @var{symbol}. When linking, a
4995 common symbol in one object file may be merged with a defined or common symbol
4996 of the same name in another object file. If @code{@value{LD}} does not see a
4997 definition for the symbol--just one or more common symbols--then it will
4998 allocate @var{length} bytes of uninitialized memory. @var{length} must be an
4999 absolute expression. If @code{@value{LD}} sees multiple common symbols with
5000 the same name, and they do not all have the same size, it will allocate space
5001 using the largest size.
5002
5003 @ifset COFF-ELF
5004 When using ELF or (as a GNU extension) PE, the @code{.comm} directive takes
5005 an optional third argument. This is the desired alignment of the symbol,
5006 specified for ELF as a byte boundary (for example, an alignment of 16 means
5007 that the least significant 4 bits of the address should be zero), and for PE
5008 as a power of two (for example, an alignment of 5 means aligned to a 32-byte
5009 boundary). The alignment must be an absolute expression, and it must be a
5010 power of two. If @code{@value{LD}} allocates uninitialized memory for the
5011 common symbol, it will use the alignment when placing the symbol. If no
5012 alignment is specified, @command{@value{AS}} will set the alignment to the
5013 largest power of two less than or equal to the size of the symbol, up to a
5014 maximum of 16 on ELF, or the default section alignment of 4 on PE@footnote{This
5015 is not the same as the executable image file alignment controlled by @code{@value{LD}}'s
5016 @samp{--section-alignment} option; image file sections in PE are aligned to
5017 multiples of 4096, which is far too large an alignment for ordinary variables.
5018 It is rather the default alignment for (non-debug) sections within object
5019 (@samp{*.o}) files, which are less strictly aligned.}.
5020 @end ifset
5021
5022 @ifset HPPA
5023 The syntax for @code{.comm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5024 @samp{@var{symbol} .comm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5025 @end ifset
5026
5027 @node Data
5028 @section @code{.data @var{subsection}}
5029 @cindex @code{data} directive
5030
5031 @code{.data} tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the
5032 end of the data subsection numbered @var{subsection} (which is an
5033 absolute expression). If @var{subsection} is omitted, it defaults
5034 to zero.
5035
5036 @node Dc
5037 @section @code{.dc[@var{size}] @var{expressions}}
5038 @cindex @code{dc} directive
5039
5040 The @code{.dc} directive expects zero or more @var{expressions} separated by
5041 commas. These expressions are evaluated and their values inserted into the
5042 current section. The size of the emitted value depends upon the suffix to the
5043 @code{.dc} directive:
5044
5045 @table @code
5046 @item @samp{.a}
5047 Emits N-bit values, where N is the size of an address on the target system.
5048 @item @samp{.b}
5049 Emits 8-bit values.
5050 @item @samp{.d}
5051 Emits double precision floating-point values.
5052 @item @samp{.l}
5053 Emits 32-bit values.
5054 @item @samp{.s}
5055 Emits single precision floating-point values.
5056 @item @samp{.w}
5057 Emits 16-bit values.
5058 Note - this is true even on targets where the @code{.word} directive would emit
5059 32-bit values.
5060 @item @samp{.x}
5061 Emits long double precision floating-point values.
5062 @end table
5063
5064 If no suffix is used then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5065
5066 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5067 point values.
5068
5069 @node Dcb
5070 @section @code{.dcb[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5071 @cindex @code{dcb} directive
5072 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5073 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5074 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5075 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5076
5077 @table @code
5078 @item @samp{.b}
5079 Emits single byte values.
5080 @item @samp{.d}
5081 Emits double-precision floating point values.
5082 @item @samp{.l}
5083 Emits 4-byte values.
5084 @item @samp{.s}
5085 Emits single-precision floating point values.
5086 @item @samp{.w}
5087 Emits 2-byte values.
5088 @item @samp{.x}
5089 Emits long double-precision floating point values.
5090 @end table
5091
5092 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5093
5094 The byte ordering is target dependent, as is the size and format of floating
5095 point values.
5096
5097 @node Ds
5098 @section @code{.ds[@var{size}] @var{number} [,@var{fill}]}
5099 @cindex @code{ds} directive
5100 This directive emits @var{number} copies of @var{fill}, each of @var{size}
5101 bytes. Both @var{number} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the
5102 comma and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. The
5103 @var{size} suffix, if present, must be one of:
5104
5105 @table @code
5106 @item @samp{.b}
5107 Emits single byte values.
5108 @item @samp{.d}
5109 Emits 8-byte values.
5110 @item @samp{.l}
5111 Emits 4-byte values.
5112 @item @samp{.p}
5113 Emits 12-byte values.
5114 @item @samp{.s}
5115 Emits 4-byte values.
5116 @item @samp{.w}
5117 Emits 2-byte values.
5118 @item @samp{.x}
5119 Emits 12-byte values.
5120 @end table
5121
5122 Note - unlike the @code{.dcb} directive the @samp{.d}, @samp{.s} and @samp{.x}
5123 suffixes do not indicate that floating-point values are to be inserted.
5124
5125 If the @var{size} suffix is omitted then @samp{.w} is assumed.
5126
5127 The byte ordering is target dependent.
5128
5129
5130 @ifset COFF
5131 @node Def
5132 @section @code{.def @var{name}}
5133
5134 @cindex @code{def} directive
5135 @cindex COFF symbols, debugging
5136 @cindex debugging COFF symbols
5137 Begin defining debugging information for a symbol @var{name}; the
5138 definition extends until the @code{.endef} directive is encountered.
5139 @end ifset
5140
5141 @ifset aout
5142 @node Desc
5143 @section @code{.desc @var{symbol}, @var{abs-expression}}
5144
5145 @cindex @code{desc} directive
5146 @cindex COFF symbol descriptor
5147 @cindex symbol descriptor, COFF
5148 This directive sets the descriptor of the symbol (@pxref{Symbol Attributes})
5149 to the low 16 bits of an absolute expression.
5150
5151 @ifset COFF
5152 The @samp{.desc} directive is not available when @command{@value{AS}} is
5153 configured for COFF output; it is only for @code{a.out} or @code{b.out}
5154 object format. For the sake of compatibility, @command{@value{AS}} accepts
5155 it, but produces no output, when configured for COFF.
5156 @end ifset
5157 @end ifset
5158
5159 @ifset COFF
5160 @node Dim
5161 @section @code{.dim}
5162
5163 @cindex @code{dim} directive
5164 @cindex COFF auxiliary symbol information
5165 @cindex auxiliary symbol information, COFF
5166 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
5167 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
5168 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs.
5169 @end ifset
5170
5171 @node Double
5172 @section @code{.double @var{flonums}}
5173
5174 @cindex @code{double} directive
5175 @cindex floating point numbers (double)
5176 @code{.double} expects zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5177 assembles floating point numbers.
5178 @ifset GENERIC
5179 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5180 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5181 @end ifset
5182 @ifclear GENERIC
5183 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5184 On the @value{TARGET} family @samp{.double} emits 64-bit floating-point numbers
5185 in @sc{ieee} format.
5186 @end ifset
5187 @end ifclear
5188
5189 @node Eject
5190 @section @code{.eject}
5191
5192 @cindex @code{eject} directive
5193 @cindex new page, in listings
5194 @cindex page, in listings
5195 @cindex listing control: new page
5196 Force a page break at this point, when generating assembly listings.
5197
5198 @node Else
5199 @section @code{.else}
5200
5201 @cindex @code{else} directive
5202 @code{.else} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5203 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It marks the beginning of a section
5204 of code to be assembled if the condition for the preceding @code{.if}
5205 was false.
5206
5207 @node Elseif
5208 @section @code{.elseif}
5209
5210 @cindex @code{elseif} directive
5211 @code{.elseif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional
5212 assembly; see @ref{If,,@code{.if}}. It is shorthand for beginning a new
5213 @code{.if} block that would otherwise fill the entire @code{.else} section.
5214
5215 @node End
5216 @section @code{.end}
5217
5218 @cindex @code{end} directive
5219 @code{.end} marks the end of the assembly file. @command{@value{AS}} does not
5220 process anything in the file past the @code{.end} directive.
5221
5222 @ifset COFF
5223 @node Endef
5224 @section @code{.endef}
5225
5226 @cindex @code{endef} directive
5227 This directive flags the end of a symbol definition begun with
5228 @code{.def}.
5229 @end ifset
5230
5231 @node Endfunc
5232 @section @code{.endfunc}
5233 @cindex @code{endfunc} directive
5234 @code{.endfunc} marks the end of a function specified with @code{.func}.
5235
5236 @node Endif
5237 @section @code{.endif}
5238
5239 @cindex @code{endif} directive
5240 @code{.endif} is part of the @command{@value{AS}} support for conditional assembly;
5241 it marks the end of a block of code that is only assembled
5242 conditionally. @xref{If,,@code{.if}}.
5243
5244 @node Equ
5245 @section @code{.equ @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5246
5247 @cindex @code{equ} directive
5248 @cindex assigning values to symbols
5249 @cindex symbols, assigning values to
5250 This directive sets the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}.
5251 It is synonymous with @samp{.set}; see @ref{Set,,@code{.set}}.
5252
5253 @ifset HPPA
5254 The syntax for @code{equ} on the HPPA is
5255 @samp{@var{symbol} .equ @var{expression}}.
5256 @end ifset
5257
5258 @ifset Z80
5259 The syntax for @code{equ} on the Z80 is
5260 @samp{@var{symbol} equ @var{expression}}.
5261 On the Z80 it is an error if @var{symbol} is already defined,
5262 but the symbol is not protected from later redefinition.
5263 Compare @ref{Equiv}.
5264 @end ifset
5265
5266 @node Equiv
5267 @section @code{.equiv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5268 @cindex @code{equiv} directive
5269 The @code{.equiv} directive is like @code{.equ} and @code{.set}, except that
5270 the assembler will signal an error if @var{symbol} is already defined. Note a
5271 symbol which has been referenced but not actually defined is considered to be
5272 undefined.
5273
5274 Except for the contents of the error message, this is roughly equivalent to
5275 @smallexample
5276 .ifdef SYM
5277 .err
5278 .endif
5279 .equ SYM,VAL
5280 @end smallexample
5281 plus it protects the symbol from later redefinition.
5282
5283 @node Eqv
5284 @section @code{.eqv @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5285 @cindex @code{eqv} directive
5286 The @code{.eqv} directive is like @code{.equiv}, but no attempt is made to
5287 evaluate the expression or any part of it immediately. Instead each time
5288 the resulting symbol is used in an expression, a snapshot of its current
5289 value is taken.
5290
5291 @node Err
5292 @section @code{.err}
5293 @cindex @code{err} directive
5294 If @command{@value{AS}} assembles a @code{.err} directive, it will print an error
5295 message and, unless the @option{-Z} option was used, it will not generate an
5296 object file. This can be used to signal an error in conditionally compiled code.
5297
5298 @node Error
5299 @section @code{.error "@var{string}"}
5300 @cindex error directive
5301
5302 Similarly to @code{.err}, this directive emits an error, but you can specify a
5303 string that will be emitted as the error message. If you don't specify the
5304 message, it defaults to @code{".error directive invoked in source file"}.
5305 @xref{Errors, ,Error and Warning Messages}.
5306
5307 @smallexample
5308 .error "This code has not been assembled and tested."
5309 @end smallexample
5310
5311 @node Exitm
5312 @section @code{.exitm}
5313 Exit early from the current macro definition. @xref{Macro}.
5314
5315 @node Extern
5316 @section @code{.extern}
5317
5318 @cindex @code{extern} directive
5319 @code{.extern} is accepted in the source program---for compatibility
5320 with other assemblers---but it is ignored. @command{@value{AS}} treats
5321 all undefined symbols as external.
5322
5323 @node Fail
5324 @section @code{.fail @var{expression}}
5325
5326 @cindex @code{fail} directive
5327 Generates an error or a warning. If the value of the @var{expression} is 500
5328 or more, @command{@value{AS}} will print a warning message. If the value is less
5329 than 500, @command{@value{AS}} will print an error message. The message will
5330 include the value of @var{expression}. This can occasionally be useful inside
5331 complex nested macros or conditional assembly.
5332
5333 @node File
5334 @section @code{.file}
5335 @cindex @code{file} directive
5336
5337 @ifclear no-file-dir
5338 There are two different versions of the @code{.file} directive. Targets
5339 that support DWARF2 line number information use the DWARF2 version of
5340 @code{.file}. Other targets use the default version.
5341
5342 @subheading Default Version
5343
5344 @cindex logical file name
5345 @cindex file name, logical
5346 This version of the @code{.file} directive tells @command{@value{AS}} that we
5347 are about to start a new logical file. The syntax is:
5348
5349 @smallexample
5350 .file @var{string}
5351 @end smallexample
5352
5353 @var{string} is the new file name. In general, the filename is
5354 recognized whether or not it is surrounded by quotes @samp{"}; but if you wish
5355 to specify an empty file name, you must give the quotes--@code{""}. This
5356 statement may go away in future: it is only recognized to be compatible with
5357 old @command{@value{AS}} programs.
5358
5359 @subheading DWARF2 Version
5360 @end ifclear
5361
5362 When emitting DWARF2 line number information, @code{.file} assigns filenames
5363 to the @code{.debug_line} file name table. The syntax is:
5364
5365 @smallexample
5366 .file @var{fileno} @var{filename}
5367 @end smallexample
5368
5369 The @var{fileno} operand should be a unique positive integer to use as the
5370 index of the entry in the table. The @var{filename} operand is a C string
5371 literal enclosed in double quotes. The @var{filename} can include directory
5372 elements. If it does, then the directory will be added to the directory table
5373 and the basename will be added to the file table.
5374
5375 The detail of filename indices is exposed to the user because the filename
5376 table is shared with the @code{.debug_info} section of the DWARF2 debugging
5377 information, and thus the user must know the exact indices that table
5378 entries will have.
5379
5380 If DWARF-5 support has been enabled via the @option{-gdwarf-5} option then
5381 an extended version of the @code{file} is also allowed:
5382
5383 @smallexample
5384 .file @var{fileno} [@var{dirname}] @var{filename} [md5 @var{value}]
5385 @end smallexample
5386
5387 With this version a separate directory name is allowed, although if this is
5388 used then @var{filename} should not contain any directory components. In
5389 addtion an md5 hash value of the contents of @var{filename} can be provided.
5390 This will be stored in the the file table as well, and can be used by tools
5391 reading the debug information to verify that the contents of the source file
5392 match the contents of the compiled file.
5393
5394 @node Fill
5395 @section @code{.fill @var{repeat} , @var{size} , @var{value}}
5396
5397 @cindex @code{fill} directive
5398 @cindex writing patterns in memory
5399 @cindex patterns, writing in memory
5400 @var{repeat}, @var{size} and @var{value} are absolute expressions.
5401 This emits @var{repeat} copies of @var{size} bytes. @var{Repeat}
5402 may be zero or more. @var{Size} may be zero or more, but if it is
5403 more than 8, then it is deemed to have the value 8, compatible with
5404 other people's assemblers. The contents of each @var{repeat} bytes
5405 is taken from an 8-byte number. The highest order 4 bytes are
5406 zero. The lowest order 4 bytes are @var{value} rendered in the
5407 byte-order of an integer on the computer @command{@value{AS}} is assembling for.
5408 Each @var{size} bytes in a repetition is taken from the lowest order
5409 @var{size} bytes of this number. Again, this bizarre behavior is
5410 compatible with other people's assemblers.
5411
5412 @var{size} and @var{value} are optional.
5413 If the second comma and @var{value} are absent, @var{value} is
5414 assumed zero. If the first comma and following tokens are absent,
5415 @var{size} is assumed to be 1.
5416
5417 @node Float
5418 @section @code{.float @var{flonums}}
5419
5420 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
5421 @cindex @code{float} directive
5422 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
5423 has the same effect as @code{.single}.
5424 @ifset GENERIC
5425 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
5426 @command{@value{AS}} is configured.
5427 @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
5428 @end ifset
5429 @ifclear GENERIC
5430 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
5431 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.float} emits 32-bit floating point numbers
5432 in @sc{ieee} format.
5433 @end ifset
5434 @end ifclear
5435
5436 @node Func
5437 @section @code{.func @var{name}[,@var{label}]}
5438 @cindex @code{func} directive
5439 @code{.func} emits debugging information to denote function @var{name}, and
5440 is ignored unless the file is assembled with debugging enabled.
5441 Only @samp{--gstabs[+]} is currently supported.
5442 @var{label} is the entry point of the function and if omitted @var{name}
5443 prepended with the @samp{leading char} is used.
5444 @samp{leading char} is usually @code{_} or nothing, depending on the target.
5445 All functions are currently defined to have @code{void} return type.
5446 The function must be terminated with @code{.endfunc}.
5447
5448 @node Global
5449 @section @code{.global @var{symbol}}, @code{.globl @var{symbol}}
5450
5451 @cindex @code{global} directive
5452 @cindex symbol, making visible to linker
5453 @code{.global} makes the symbol visible to @code{@value{LD}}. If you define
5454 @var{symbol} in your partial program, its value is made available to
5455 other partial programs that are linked with it. Otherwise,
5456 @var{symbol} takes its attributes from a symbol of the same name
5457 from another file linked into the same program.
5458
5459 Both spellings (@samp{.globl} and @samp{.global}) are accepted, for
5460 compatibility with other assemblers.
5461
5462 @ifset HPPA
5463 On the HPPA, @code{.global} is not always enough to make it accessible to other
5464 partial programs. You may need the HPPA-only @code{.EXPORT} directive as well.
5465 @xref{HPPA Directives, ,HPPA Assembler Directives}.
5466 @end ifset
5467
5468 @ifset ELF
5469 @node Gnu_attribute
5470 @section @code{.gnu_attribute @var{tag},@var{value}}
5471 Record a @sc{gnu} object attribute for this file. @xref{Object Attributes}.
5472
5473 @node Hidden
5474 @section @code{.hidden @var{names}}
5475
5476 @cindex @code{hidden} directive
5477 @cindex visibility
5478 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5479 @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal,,@code{.internal}}) and
5480 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5481
5482 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5483 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5484 @code{hidden} which means that the symbols are not visible to other components.
5485 Such symbols are always considered to be @code{protected} as well.
5486 @end ifset
5487
5488 @node hword
5489 @section @code{.hword @var{expressions}}
5490
5491 @cindex @code{hword} directive
5492 @cindex integers, 16-bit
5493 @cindex numbers, 16-bit
5494 @cindex sixteen bit integers
5495 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
5496 a 16 bit number for each.
5497
5498 @ifset GENERIC
5499 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}; depending on the target
5500 architecture, it may also be a synonym for @samp{.word}.
5501 @end ifset
5502 @ifclear GENERIC
5503 @ifset W32
5504 This directive is a synonym for @samp{.short}.
5505 @end ifset
5506 @ifset W16
5507 This directive is a synonym for both @samp{.short} and @samp{.word}.
5508 @end ifset
5509 @end ifclear
5510
5511 @node Ident
5512 @section @code{.ident}
5513
5514 @cindex @code{ident} directive
5515
5516 This directive is used by some assemblers to place tags in object files. The
5517 behavior of this directive varies depending on the target. When using the
5518 a.out object file format, @command{@value{AS}} simply accepts the directive for
5519 source-file compatibility with existing assemblers, but does not emit anything
5520 for it. When using COFF, comments are emitted to the @code{.comment} or
5521 @code{.rdata} section, depending on the target. When using ELF, comments are
5522 emitted to the @code{.comment} section.
5523
5524 @node If
5525 @section @code{.if @var{absolute expression}}
5526
5527 @cindex conditional assembly
5528 @cindex @code{if} directive
5529 @code{.if} marks the beginning of a section of code which is only
5530 considered part of the source program being assembled if the argument
5531 (which must be an @var{absolute expression}) is non-zero. The end of
5532 the conditional section of code must be marked by @code{.endif}
5533 (@pxref{Endif,,@code{.endif}}); optionally, you may include code for the
5534 alternative condition, flagged by @code{.else} (@pxref{Else,,@code{.else}}).
5535 If you have several conditions to check, @code{.elseif} may be used to avoid
5536 nesting blocks if/else within each subsequent @code{.else} block.
5537
5538 The following variants of @code{.if} are also supported:
5539 @table @code
5540 @cindex @code{ifdef} directive
5541 @item .ifdef @var{symbol}
5542 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5543 has been defined. Note a symbol which has been referenced but not yet defined
5544 is considered to be undefined.
5545
5546 @cindex @code{ifb} directive
5547 @item .ifb @var{text}
5548 Assembles the following section of code if the operand is blank (empty).
5549
5550 @cindex @code{ifc} directive
5551 @item .ifc @var{string1},@var{string2}
5552 Assembles the following section of code if the two strings are the same. The
5553 strings may be optionally quoted with single quotes. If they are not quoted,
5554 the first string stops at the first comma, and the second string stops at the
5555 end of the line. Strings which contain whitespace should be quoted. The
5556 string comparison is case sensitive.
5557
5558 @cindex @code{ifeq} directive
5559 @item .ifeq @var{absolute expression}
5560 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is zero.
5561
5562 @cindex @code{ifeqs} directive
5563 @item .ifeqs @var{string1},@var{string2}
5564 Another form of @code{.ifc}. The strings must be quoted using double quotes.
5565
5566 @cindex @code{ifge} directive
5567 @item .ifge @var{absolute expression}
5568 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than or
5569 equal to zero.
5570
5571 @cindex @code{ifgt} directive
5572 @item .ifgt @var{absolute expression}
5573 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is greater than zero.
5574
5575 @cindex @code{ifle} directive
5576 @item .ifle @var{absolute expression}
5577 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than or equal
5578 to zero.
5579
5580 @cindex @code{iflt} directive
5581 @item .iflt @var{absolute expression}
5582 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is less than zero.
5583
5584 @cindex @code{ifnb} directive
5585 @item .ifnb @var{text}
5586 Like @code{.ifb}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5587 following section of code if the operand is non-blank (non-empty).
5588
5589 @cindex @code{ifnc} directive
5590 @item .ifnc @var{string1},@var{string2}.
5591 Like @code{.ifc}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5592 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5593
5594 @cindex @code{ifndef} directive
5595 @cindex @code{ifnotdef} directive
5596 @item .ifndef @var{symbol}
5597 @itemx .ifnotdef @var{symbol}
5598 Assembles the following section of code if the specified @var{symbol}
5599 has not been defined. Both spelling variants are equivalent. Note a symbol
5600 which has been referenced but not yet defined is considered to be undefined.
5601
5602 @cindex @code{ifne} directive
5603 @item .ifne @var{absolute expression}
5604 Assembles the following section of code if the argument is not equal to zero
5605 (in other words, this is equivalent to @code{.if}).
5606
5607 @cindex @code{ifnes} directive
5608 @item .ifnes @var{string1},@var{string2}
5609 Like @code{.ifeqs}, but the sense of the test is reversed: this assembles the
5610 following section of code if the two strings are not the same.
5611 @end table
5612
5613 @node Incbin
5614 @section @code{.incbin "@var{file}"[,@var{skip}[,@var{count}]]}
5615
5616 @cindex @code{incbin} directive
5617 @cindex binary files, including
5618 The @code{incbin} directive includes @var{file} verbatim at the current
5619 location. You can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line
5620 option (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5621 around @var{file}.
5622
5623 The @var{skip} argument skips a number of bytes from the start of the
5624 @var{file}. The @var{count} argument indicates the maximum number of bytes to
5625 read. Note that the data is not aligned in any way, so it is the user's
5626 responsibility to make sure that proper alignment is provided both before and
5627 after the @code{incbin} directive.
5628
5629 @node Include
5630 @section @code{.include "@var{file}"}
5631
5632 @cindex @code{include} directive
5633 @cindex supporting files, including
5634 @cindex files, including
5635 This directive provides a way to include supporting files at specified
5636 points in your source program. The code from @var{file} is assembled as
5637 if it followed the point of the @code{.include}; when the end of the
5638 included file is reached, assembly of the original file continues. You
5639 can control the search paths used with the @samp{-I} command-line option
5640 (@pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}). Quotation marks are required
5641 around @var{file}.
5642
5643 @node Int
5644 @section @code{.int @var{expressions}}
5645
5646 @cindex @code{int} directive
5647 @cindex integers, 32-bit
5648 Expect zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section, separated by commas.
5649 For each expression, emit a number that, at run time, is the value of that
5650 expression. The byte order and bit size of the number depends on what kind
5651 of target the assembly is for.
5652
5653 @ifclear GENERIC
5654 @ifset H8
5655 On most forms of the H8/300, @code{.int} emits 16-bit
5656 integers. On the H8/300H and the Renesas SH, however, @code{.int} emits
5657 32-bit integers.
5658 @end ifset
5659 @end ifclear
5660
5661 @ifset ELF
5662 @node Internal
5663 @section @code{.internal @var{names}}
5664
5665 @cindex @code{internal} directive
5666 @cindex visibility
5667 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
5668 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden,,@code{.hidden}}) and
5669 @code{.protected} (@pxref{Protected,,@code{.protected}}).
5670
5671 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
5672 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
5673 @code{internal} which means that the symbols are considered to be @code{hidden}
5674 (i.e., not visible to other components), and that some extra, processor specific
5675 processing must also be performed upon the symbols as well.
5676 @end ifset
5677
5678 @node Irp
5679 @section @code{.irp @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5680
5681 @cindex @code{irp} directive
5682 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5683 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irp} directive, and is
5684 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each @var{value}, @var{symbol} is
5685 set to @var{value}, and the sequence of statements is assembled. If no
5686 @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is assembled once, with
5687 @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to @var{symbol} within the
5688 sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5689
5690 For example, assembling
5691
5692 @example
5693 .irp param,1,2,3
5694 move d\param,sp@@-
5695 .endr
5696 @end example
5697
5698 is equivalent to assembling
5699
5700 @example
5701 move d1,sp@@-
5702 move d2,sp@@-
5703 move d3,sp@@-
5704 @end example
5705
5706 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also @ref{Macro}.
5707
5708 @node Irpc
5709 @section @code{.irpc @var{symbol},@var{values}}@dots{}
5710
5711 @cindex @code{irpc} directive
5712 Evaluate a sequence of statements assigning different values to @var{symbol}.
5713 The sequence of statements starts at the @code{.irpc} directive, and is
5714 terminated by an @code{.endr} directive. For each character in @var{value},
5715 @var{symbol} is set to the character, and the sequence of statements is
5716 assembled. If no @var{value} is listed, the sequence of statements is
5717 assembled once, with @var{symbol} set to the null string. To refer to
5718 @var{symbol} within the sequence of statements, use @var{\symbol}.
5719
5720 For example, assembling
5721
5722 @example
5723 .irpc param,123
5724 move d\param,sp@@-
5725 .endr
5726 @end example
5727
5728 is equivalent to assembling
5729
5730 @example
5731 move d1,sp@@-
5732 move d2,sp@@-
5733 move d3,sp@@-
5734 @end example
5735
5736 For some caveats with the spelling of @var{symbol}, see also the discussion
5737 at @xref{Macro}.
5738
5739 @node Lcomm
5740 @section @code{.lcomm @var{symbol} , @var{length}}
5741
5742 @cindex @code{lcomm} directive
5743 @cindex local common symbols
5744 @cindex symbols, local common
5745 Reserve @var{length} (an absolute expression) bytes for a local common
5746 denoted by @var{symbol}. The section and value of @var{symbol} are
5747 those of the new local common. The addresses are allocated in the bss
5748 section, so that at run-time the bytes start off zeroed. @var{Symbol}
5749 is not declared global (@pxref{Global,,@code{.global}}), so is normally
5750 not visible to @code{@value{LD}}.
5751
5752 @ifset GENERIC
5753 Some targets permit a third argument to be used with @code{.lcomm}. This
5754 argument specifies the desired alignment of the symbol in the bss section.
5755 @end ifset
5756
5757 @ifset HPPA
5758 The syntax for @code{.lcomm} differs slightly on the HPPA. The syntax is
5759 @samp{@var{symbol} .lcomm, @var{length}}; @var{symbol} is optional.
5760 @end ifset
5761
5762 @node Lflags
5763 @section @code{.lflags}
5764
5765 @cindex @code{lflags} directive (ignored)
5766 @command{@value{AS}} accepts this directive, for compatibility with other
5767 assemblers, but ignores it.
5768
5769 @ifclear no-line-dir
5770 @node Line
5771 @section @code{.line @var{line-number}}
5772
5773 @cindex @code{line} directive
5774 @cindex logical line number
5775 @ifset aout
5776 Change the logical line number. @var{line-number} must be an absolute
5777 expression. The next line has that logical line number. Therefore any other
5778 statements on the current line (after a statement separator character) are
5779 reported as on logical line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1. One day
5780 @command{@value{AS}} will no longer support this directive: it is recognized only
5781 for compatibility with existing assembler programs.
5782 @end ifset
5783
5784 Even though this is a directive associated with the @code{a.out} or
5785 @code{b.out} object-code formats, @command{@value{AS}} still recognizes it
5786 when producing COFF output, and treats @samp{.line} as though it
5787 were the COFF @samp{.ln} @emph{if} it is found outside a
5788 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair.
5789
5790 Inside a @code{.def}, @samp{.line} is, instead, one of the directives
5791 used by compilers to generate auxiliary symbol information for
5792 debugging.
5793 @end ifclear
5794
5795 @node Linkonce
5796 @section @code{.linkonce [@var{type}]}
5797 @cindex COMDAT
5798 @cindex @code{linkonce} directive
5799 @cindex common sections
5800 Mark the current section so that the linker only includes a single copy of it.
5801 This may be used to include the same section in several different object files,
5802 but ensure that the linker will only include it once in the final output file.
5803 The @code{.linkonce} pseudo-op must be used for each instance of the section.
5804 Duplicate sections are detected based on the section name, so it should be
5805 unique.
5806
5807 This directive is only supported by a few object file formats; as of this
5808 writing, the only object file format which supports it is the Portable
5809 Executable format used on Windows NT.
5810
5811 The @var{type} argument is optional. If specified, it must be one of the
5812 following strings. For example:
5813 @smallexample
5814 .linkonce same_size
5815 @end smallexample
5816 Not all types may be supported on all object file formats.
5817
5818 @table @code
5819 @item discard
5820 Silently discard duplicate sections. This is the default.
5821
5822 @item one_only
5823 Warn if there are duplicate sections, but still keep only one copy.
5824
5825 @item same_size
5826 Warn if any of the duplicates have different sizes.
5827
5828 @item same_contents
5829 Warn if any of the duplicates do not have exactly the same contents.
5830 @end table
5831
5832 @node List
5833 @section @code{.list}
5834
5835 @cindex @code{list} directive
5836 @cindex listing control, turning on
5837 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.nolist} directive) whether or
5838 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
5839 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
5840 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
5841 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
5842
5843 By default, listings are disabled. When you enable them (with the
5844 @samp{-a} command-line option; @pxref{Invoking,,Command-Line Options}),
5845 the initial value of the listing counter is one.
5846
5847 @node Ln
5848 @section @code{.ln @var{line-number}}
5849
5850 @cindex @code{ln} directive
5851 @ifclear no-line-dir
5852 @samp{.ln} is a synonym for @samp{.line}.
5853 @end ifclear
5854 @ifset no-line-dir
5855 Tell @command{@value{AS}} to change the logical line number. @var{line-number}
5856 must be an absolute expression. The next line has that logical
5857 line number, so any other statements on the current line (after a
5858 statement separator character @code{;}) are reported as on logical
5859 line number @var{line-number} @minus{} 1.
5860 @end ifset
5861
5862 @node Loc
5863 @section @code{.loc @var{fileno} @var{lineno} [@var{column}] [@var{options}]}
5864 @cindex @code{loc} directive
5865 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5866 the @code{.loc} directive will add a row to the @code{.debug_line} line
5867 number matrix corresponding to the immediately following assembly
5868 instruction. The @var{fileno}, @var{lineno}, and optional @var{column}
5869 arguments will be applied to the @code{.debug_line} state machine before
5870 the row is added.
5871
5872 The @var{options} are a sequence of the following tokens in any order:
5873
5874 @table @code
5875 @item basic_block
5876 This option will set the @code{basic_block} register in the
5877 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5878
5879 @item prologue_end
5880 This option will set the @code{prologue_end} register in the
5881 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5882
5883 @item epilogue_begin
5884 This option will set the @code{epilogue_begin} register in the
5885 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{true}.
5886
5887 @item is_stmt @var{value}
5888 This option will set the @code{is_stmt} register in the
5889 @code{.debug_line} state machine to @code{value}, which must be
5890 either 0 or 1.
5891
5892 @item isa @var{value}
5893 This directive will set the @code{isa} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5894 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5895
5896 @item discriminator @var{value}
5897 This directive will set the @code{discriminator} register in the @code{.debug_line}
5898 state machine to @var{value}, which must be an unsigned integer.
5899
5900 @item view @var{value}
5901 This option causes a row to be added to @code{.debug_line} in reference to the
5902 current address (which might not be the same as that of the following assembly
5903 instruction), and to associate @var{value} with the @code{view} register in the
5904 @code{.debug_line} state machine. If @var{value} is a label, both the
5905 @code{view} register and the label are set to the number of prior @code{.loc}
5906 directives at the same program location. If @var{value} is the literal
5907 @code{0}, the @code{view} register is set to zero, and the assembler asserts
5908 that there aren't any prior @code{.loc} directives at the same program
5909 location. If @var{value} is the literal @code{-0}, the assembler arrange for
5910 the @code{view} register to be reset in this row, even if there are prior
5911 @code{.loc} directives at the same program location.
5912
5913 @end table
5914
5915 @node Loc_mark_labels
5916 @section @code{.loc_mark_labels @var{enable}}
5917 @cindex @code{loc_mark_labels} directive
5918 When emitting DWARF2 line number information,
5919 the @code{.loc_mark_labels} directive makes the assembler emit an entry
5920 to the @code{.debug_line} line number matrix with the @code{basic_block}
5921 register in the state machine set whenever a code label is seen.
5922 The @var{enable} argument should be either 1 or 0, to enable or disable
5923 this function respectively.
5924
5925 @ifset ELF
5926 @node Local
5927 @section @code{.local @var{names}}
5928
5929 @cindex @code{local} directive
5930 This directive, which is available for ELF targets, marks each symbol in
5931 the comma-separated list of @code{names} as a local symbol so that it
5932 will not be externally visible. If the symbols do not already exist,
5933 they will be created.
5934
5935 For targets where the @code{.lcomm} directive (@pxref{Lcomm}) does not
5936 accept an alignment argument, which is the case for most ELF targets,
5937 the @code{.local} directive can be used in combination with @code{.comm}
5938 (@pxref{Comm}) to define aligned local common data.
5939 @end ifset
5940
5941 @node Long
5942 @section @code{.long @var{expressions}}
5943
5944 @cindex @code{long} directive
5945 @code{.long} is the same as @samp{.int}. @xref{Int,,@code{.int}}.
5946
5947 @ignore
5948 @c no one seems to know what this is for or whether this description is
5949 @c what it really ought to do
5950 @node Lsym
5951 @section @code{.lsym @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
5952
5953 @cindex @code{lsym} directive
5954 @cindex symbol, not referenced in assembly
5955 @code{.lsym} creates a new symbol named @var{symbol}, but does not put it in
5956 the hash table, ensuring it cannot be referenced by name during the
5957 rest of the assembly. This sets the attributes of the symbol to be
5958 the same as the expression value:
5959 @smallexample
5960 @var{other} = @var{descriptor} = 0
5961 @var{type} = @r{(section of @var{expression})}
5962 @var{value} = @var{expression}
5963 @end smallexample
5964 @noindent
5965 The new symbol is not flagged as external.
5966 @end ignore
5967
5968 @node Macro
5969 @section @code{.macro}
5970
5971 @cindex macros
5972 The commands @code{.macro} and @code{.endm} allow you to define macros that
5973 generate assembly output. For example, this definition specifies a macro
5974 @code{sum} that puts a sequence of numbers into memory:
5975
5976 @example
5977 .macro sum from=0, to=5
5978 .long \from
5979 .if \to-\from
5980 sum "(\from+1)",\to
5981 .endif
5982 .endm
5983 @end example
5984
5985 @noindent
5986 With that definition, @samp{SUM 0,5} is equivalent to this assembly input:
5987
5988 @example
5989 .long 0
5990 .long 1
5991 .long 2
5992 .long 3
5993 .long 4
5994 .long 5
5995 @end example
5996
5997 @ftable @code
5998 @item .macro @var{macname}
5999 @itemx .macro @var{macname} @var{macargs} @dots{}
6000 @cindex @code{macro} directive
6001 Begin the definition of a macro called @var{macname}. If your macro
6002 definition requires arguments, specify their names after the macro name,
6003 separated by commas or spaces. You can qualify the macro argument to
6004 indicate whether all invocations must specify a non-blank value (through
6005 @samp{:@code{req}}), or whether it takes all of the remaining arguments
6006 (through @samp{:@code{vararg}}). You can supply a default value for any
6007 macro argument by following the name with @samp{=@var{deflt}}. You
6008 cannot define two macros with the same @var{macname} unless it has been
6009 subject to the @code{.purgem} directive (@pxref{Purgem}) between the two
6010 definitions. For example, these are all valid @code{.macro} statements:
6011
6012 @table @code
6013 @item .macro comm
6014 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{comm}, which takes no
6015 arguments.
6016
6017 @item .macro plus1 p, p1
6018 @itemx .macro plus1 p p1
6019 Either statement begins the definition of a macro called @code{plus1},
6020 which takes two arguments; within the macro definition, write
6021 @samp{\p} or @samp{\p1} to evaluate the arguments.
6022
6023 @item .macro reserve_str p1=0 p2
6024 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{reserve_str}, with two
6025 arguments. The first argument has a default value, but not the second.
6026 After the definition is complete, you can call the macro either as
6027 @samp{reserve_str @var{a},@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating to
6028 @var{a} and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}), or as @samp{reserve_str
6029 ,@var{b}} (with @samp{\p1} evaluating as the default, in this case
6030 @samp{0}, and @samp{\p2} evaluating to @var{b}).
6031
6032 @item .macro m p1:req, p2=0, p3:vararg
6033 Begin the definition of a macro called @code{m}, with at least three
6034 arguments. The first argument must always have a value specified, but
6035 not the second, which instead has a default value. The third formal
6036 will get assigned all remaining arguments specified at invocation time.
6037
6038 When you call a macro, you can specify the argument values either by
6039 position, or by keyword. For example, @samp{sum 9,17} is equivalent to
6040 @samp{sum to=17, from=9}.
6041
6042 @end table
6043
6044 Note that since each of the @var{macargs} can be an identifier exactly
6045 as any other one permitted by the target architecture, there may be
6046 occasional problems if the target hand-crafts special meanings to certain
6047 characters when they occur in a special position. For example, if the colon
6048 (@code{:}) is generally permitted to be part of a symbol name, but the
6049 architecture specific code special-cases it when occurring as the final
6050 character of a symbol (to denote a label), then the macro parameter
6051 replacement code will have no way of knowing that and consider the whole
6052 construct (including the colon) an identifier, and check only this
6053 identifier for being the subject to parameter substitution. So for example
6054 this macro definition:
6055
6056 @example
6057 .macro label l
6058 \l:
6059 .endm
6060 @end example
6061
6062 might not work as expected. Invoking @samp{label foo} might not create a label
6063 called @samp{foo} but instead just insert the text @samp{\l:} into the
6064 assembler source, probably generating an error about an unrecognised
6065 identifier.
6066
6067 Similarly problems might occur with the period character (@samp{.})
6068 which is often allowed inside opcode names (and hence identifier names). So
6069 for example constructing a macro to build an opcode from a base name and a
6070 length specifier like this:
6071
6072 @example
6073 .macro opcode base length
6074 \base.\length
6075 .endm
6076 @end example
6077
6078 and invoking it as @samp{opcode store l} will not create a @samp{store.l}
6079 instruction but instead generate some kind of error as the assembler tries to
6080 interpret the text @samp{\base.\length}.
6081
6082 There are several possible ways around this problem:
6083
6084 @table @code
6085 @item Insert white space
6086 If it is possible to use white space characters then this is the simplest
6087 solution. eg:
6088
6089 @example
6090 .macro label l
6091 \l :
6092 .endm
6093 @end example
6094
6095 @item Use @samp{\()}
6096 The string @samp{\()} can be used to separate the end of a macro argument from
6097 the following text. eg:
6098
6099 @example
6100 .macro opcode base length
6101 \base\().\length
6102 .endm
6103 @end example
6104
6105 @item Use the alternate macro syntax mode
6106 In the alternative macro syntax mode the ampersand character (@samp{&}) can be
6107 used as a separator. eg:
6108
6109 @example
6110 .altmacro
6111 .macro label l
6112 l&:
6113 .endm
6114 @end example
6115 @end table
6116
6117 Note: this problem of correctly identifying string parameters to pseudo ops
6118 also applies to the identifiers used in @code{.irp} (@pxref{Irp})
6119 and @code{.irpc} (@pxref{Irpc}) as well.
6120
6121 @item .endm
6122 @cindex @code{endm} directive
6123 Mark the end of a macro definition.
6124
6125 @item .exitm
6126 @cindex @code{exitm} directive
6127 Exit early from the current macro definition.
6128
6129 @cindex number of macros executed
6130 @cindex macros, count executed
6131 @item \@@
6132 @command{@value{AS}} maintains a counter of how many macros it has
6133 executed in this pseudo-variable; you can copy that number to your
6134 output with @samp{\@@}, but @emph{only within a macro definition}.
6135
6136 @item LOCAL @var{name} [ , @dots{} ]
6137 @emph{Warning: @code{LOCAL} is only available if you select ``alternate
6138 macro syntax'' with @samp{--alternate} or @code{.altmacro}.}
6139 @xref{Altmacro,,@code{.altmacro}}.
6140 @end ftable
6141
6142 @node MRI
6143 @section @code{.mri @var{val}}
6144
6145 @cindex @code{mri} directive
6146 @cindex MRI mode, temporarily
6147 If @var{val} is non-zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to enter MRI mode. If
6148 @var{val} is zero, this tells @command{@value{AS}} to exit MRI mode. This change
6149 affects code assembled until the next @code{.mri} directive, or until the end
6150 of the file. @xref{M, MRI mode, MRI mode}.
6151
6152 @node Noaltmacro
6153 @section @code{.noaltmacro}
6154 Disable alternate macro mode. @xref{Altmacro}.
6155
6156 @node Nolist
6157 @section @code{.nolist}
6158
6159 @cindex @code{nolist} directive
6160 @cindex listing control, turning off
6161 Control (in conjunction with the @code{.list} directive) whether or
6162 not assembly listings are generated. These two directives maintain an
6163 internal counter (which is zero initially). @code{.list} increments the
6164 counter, and @code{.nolist} decrements it. Assembly listings are
6165 generated whenever the counter is greater than zero.
6166
6167 @node Nops
6168 @section @code{.nops @var{size}[, @var{control}]}
6169
6170 @cindex @code{nops} directive
6171 @cindex filling memory with no-op instructions
6172 This directive emits @var{size} bytes filled with no-op instructions.
6173 @var{size} is absolute expression, which must be a positve value.
6174 @var{control} controls how no-op instructions should be generated. If
6175 the comma and @var{control} are omitted, @var{control} is assumed to be
6176 zero.
6177
6178 Note: For Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 targets, @var{control} specifies
6179 the size limit of a no-op instruction. The valid values of @var{control}
6180 are between 0 and 4 in 16-bit mode, between 0 and 7 when tuning for
6181 older processors in 32-bit mode, between 0 and 11 in 64-bit mode or when
6182 tuning for newer processors in 32-bit mode. When 0 is used, the no-op
6183 instruction size limit is set to the maximum supported size.
6184
6185 @node Octa
6186 @section @code{.octa @var{bignums}}
6187
6188 @c FIXME: double size emitted for "octa" on some? Or warn?
6189 @cindex @code{octa} directive
6190 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6191 @cindex sixteen byte integer
6192 This directive expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For each
6193 bignum, it emits a 16-byte integer.
6194
6195 The term ``octa'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6196 hence @emph{octa}-word for 16 bytes.
6197
6198 @node Offset
6199 @section @code{.offset @var{loc}}
6200
6201 @cindex @code{offset} directive
6202 Set the location counter to @var{loc} in the absolute section. @var{loc} must
6203 be an absolute expression. This directive may be useful for defining
6204 symbols with absolute values. Do not confuse it with the @code{.org}
6205 directive.
6206
6207 @node Org
6208 @section @code{.org @var{new-lc} , @var{fill}}
6209
6210 @cindex @code{org} directive
6211 @cindex location counter, advancing
6212 @cindex advancing location counter
6213 @cindex current address, advancing
6214 Advance the location counter of the current section to
6215 @var{new-lc}. @var{new-lc} is either an absolute expression or an
6216 expression with the same section as the current subsection. That is,
6217 you can't use @code{.org} to cross sections: if @var{new-lc} has the
6218 wrong section, the @code{.org} directive is ignored. To be compatible
6219 with former assemblers, if the section of @var{new-lc} is absolute,
6220 @command{@value{AS}} issues a warning, then pretends the section of @var{new-lc}
6221 is the same as the current subsection.
6222
6223 @code{.org} may only increase the location counter, or leave it
6224 unchanged; you cannot use @code{.org} to move the location counter
6225 backwards.
6226
6227 @c double negative used below "not undefined" because this is a specific
6228 @c reference to "undefined" (as SEG_UNKNOWN is called in this manual)
6229 @c section. doc@cygnus.com 18feb91
6230 Because @command{@value{AS}} tries to assemble programs in one pass, @var{new-lc}
6231 may not be undefined. If you really detest this restriction we eagerly await
6232 a chance to share your improved assembler.
6233
6234 Beware that the origin is relative to the start of the section, not
6235 to the start of the subsection. This is compatible with other
6236 people's assemblers.
6237
6238 When the location counter (of the current subsection) is advanced, the
6239 intervening bytes are filled with @var{fill} which should be an
6240 absolute expression. If the comma and @var{fill} are omitted,
6241 @var{fill} defaults to zero.
6242
6243 @node P2align
6244 @section @code{.p2align[wl] [@var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}[, @var{abs-expr}]]]}
6245
6246 @cindex padding the location counter given a power of two
6247 @cindex @code{p2align} directive
6248 Pad the location counter (in the current subsection) to a particular
6249 storage boundary. The first expression (which must be absolute) is the
6250 number of low-order zero bits the location counter must have after
6251 advancement. For example @samp{.p2align 3} advances the location
6252 counter until it is a multiple of 8. If the location counter is already a
6253 multiple of 8, no change is needed. If the expression is omitted then a
6254 default value of 0 is used, effectively disabling alignment requirements.
6255
6256 The second expression (also absolute) gives the fill value to be stored in the
6257 padding bytes. It (and the comma) may be omitted. If it is omitted, the
6258 padding bytes are normally zero. However, on most systems, if the section is
6259 marked as containing code and the fill value is omitted, the space is filled
6260 with no-op instructions.
6261
6262 The third expression is also absolute, and is also optional. If it is present,
6263 it is the maximum number of bytes that should be skipped by this alignment
6264 directive. If doing the alignment would require skipping more bytes than the
6265 specified maximum, then the alignment is not done at all. You can omit the
6266 fill value (the second argument) entirely by simply using two commas after the
6267 required alignment; this can be useful if you want the alignment to be filled
6268 with no-op instructions when appropriate.
6269
6270 @cindex @code{p2alignw} directive
6271 @cindex @code{p2alignl} directive
6272 The @code{.p2alignw} and @code{.p2alignl} directives are variants of the
6273 @code{.p2align} directive. The @code{.p2alignw} directive treats the fill
6274 pattern as a two byte word value. The @code{.p2alignl} directives treats the
6275 fill pattern as a four byte longword value. For example, @code{.p2alignw
6276 2,0x368d} will align to a multiple of 4. If it skips two bytes, they will be
6277 filled in with the value 0x368d (the exact placement of the bytes depends upon
6278 the endianness of the processor). If it skips 1 or 3 bytes, the fill value is
6279 undefined.
6280
6281 @ifset ELF
6282 @node PopSection
6283 @section @code{.popsection}
6284
6285 @cindex @code{popsection} directive
6286 @cindex Section Stack
6287 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6288 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6289 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.previous}
6290 (@pxref{Previous}).
6291
6292 This directive replaces the current section (and subsection) with the top
6293 section (and subsection) on the section stack. This section is popped off the
6294 stack.
6295 @end ifset
6296
6297 @ifset ELF
6298 @node Previous
6299 @section @code{.previous}
6300
6301 @cindex @code{previous} directive
6302 @cindex Section Stack
6303 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6304 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6305 @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}), and @code{.popsection}
6306 (@pxref{PopSection}).
6307
6308 This directive swaps the current section (and subsection) with most recently
6309 referenced section/subsection pair prior to this one. Multiple
6310 @code{.previous} directives in a row will flip between two sections (and their
6311 subsections). For example:
6312
6313 @smallexample
6314 .section A
6315 .subsection 1
6316 .word 0x1234
6317 .subsection 2
6318 .word 0x5678
6319 .previous
6320 .word 0x9abc
6321 @end smallexample
6322
6323 Will place 0x1234 and 0x9abc into subsection 1 and 0x5678 into subsection 2 of
6324 section A. Whilst:
6325
6326 @smallexample
6327 .section A
6328 .subsection 1
6329 # Now in section A subsection 1
6330 .word 0x1234
6331 .section B
6332 .subsection 0
6333 # Now in section B subsection 0
6334 .word 0x5678
6335 .subsection 1
6336 # Now in section B subsection 1
6337 .word 0x9abc
6338 .previous
6339 # Now in section B subsection 0
6340 .word 0xdef0
6341 @end smallexample
6342
6343 Will place 0x1234 into section A, 0x5678 and 0xdef0 into subsection 0 of
6344 section B and 0x9abc into subsection 1 of section B.
6345
6346 In terms of the section stack, this directive swaps the current section with
6347 the top section on the section stack.
6348 @end ifset
6349
6350 @node Print
6351 @section @code{.print @var{string}}
6352
6353 @cindex @code{print} directive
6354 @command{@value{AS}} will print @var{string} on the standard output during
6355 assembly. You must put @var{string} in double quotes.
6356
6357 @ifset ELF
6358 @node Protected
6359 @section @code{.protected @var{names}}
6360
6361 @cindex @code{protected} directive
6362 @cindex visibility
6363 This is one of the ELF visibility directives. The other two are
6364 @code{.hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}) and @code{.internal} (@pxref{Internal}).
6365
6366 This directive overrides the named symbols default visibility (which is set by
6367 their binding: local, global or weak). The directive sets the visibility to
6368 @code{protected} which means that any references to the symbols from within the
6369 components that defines them must be resolved to the definition in that
6370 component, even if a definition in another component would normally preempt
6371 this.
6372 @end ifset
6373
6374 @node Psize
6375 @section @code{.psize @var{lines} , @var{columns}}
6376
6377 @cindex @code{psize} directive
6378 @cindex listing control: paper size
6379 @cindex paper size, for listings
6380 Use this directive to declare the number of lines---and, optionally, the
6381 number of columns---to use for each page, when generating listings.
6382
6383 If you do not use @code{.psize}, listings use a default line-count
6384 of 60. You may omit the comma and @var{columns} specification; the
6385 default width is 200 columns.
6386
6387 @command{@value{AS}} generates formfeeds whenever the specified number of
6388 lines is exceeded (or whenever you explicitly request one, using
6389 @code{.eject}).
6390
6391 If you specify @var{lines} as @code{0}, no formfeeds are generated save
6392 those explicitly specified with @code{.eject}.
6393
6394 @node Purgem
6395 @section @code{.purgem @var{name}}
6396
6397 @cindex @code{purgem} directive
6398 Undefine the macro @var{name}, so that later uses of the string will not be
6399 expanded. @xref{Macro}.
6400
6401 @ifset ELF
6402 @node PushSection
6403 @section @code{.pushsection @var{name} [, @var{subsection}] [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{arguments}]]]}
6404
6405 @cindex @code{pushsection} directive
6406 @cindex Section Stack
6407 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6408 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}),
6409 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
6410 (@pxref{Previous}).
6411
6412 This directive pushes the current section (and subsection) onto the
6413 top of the section stack, and then replaces the current section and
6414 subsection with @code{name} and @code{subsection}. The optional
6415 @code{flags}, @code{type} and @code{arguments} are treated the same
6416 as in the @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}) directive.
6417 @end ifset
6418
6419 @node Quad
6420 @section @code{.quad @var{bignums}}
6421
6422 @cindex @code{quad} directive
6423 @code{.quad} expects zero or more bignums, separated by commas. For
6424 each bignum, it emits
6425 @ifclear bignum-16
6426 an 8-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 8 bytes, it prints a
6427 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 8 bytes of the bignum.
6428 @cindex eight-byte integer
6429 @cindex integer, 8-byte
6430
6431 The term ``quad'' comes from contexts in which a ``word'' is two bytes;
6432 hence @emph{quad}-word for 8 bytes.
6433 @end ifclear
6434 @ifset bignum-16
6435 a 16-byte integer. If the bignum won't fit in 16 bytes, it prints a
6436 warning message; and just takes the lowest order 16 bytes of the bignum.
6437 @cindex sixteen-byte integer
6438 @cindex integer, 16-byte
6439 @end ifset
6440
6441 @node Reloc
6442 @section @code{.reloc @var{offset}, @var{reloc_name}[, @var{expression}]}
6443
6444 @cindex @code{reloc} directive
6445 Generate a relocation at @var{offset} of type @var{reloc_name} with value
6446 @var{expression}. If @var{offset} is a number, the relocation is generated in
6447 the current section. If @var{offset} is an expression that resolves to a
6448 symbol plus offset, the relocation is generated in the given symbol's section.
6449 @var{expression}, if present, must resolve to a symbol plus addend or to an
6450 absolute value, but note that not all targets support an addend. e.g. ELF REL
6451 targets such as i386 store an addend in the section contents rather than in the
6452 relocation. This low level interface does not support addends stored in the
6453 section.
6454
6455 @node Rept
6456 @section @code{.rept @var{count}}
6457
6458 @cindex @code{rept} directive
6459 Repeat the sequence of lines between the @code{.rept} directive and the next
6460 @code{.endr} directive @var{count} times.
6461
6462 For example, assembling
6463
6464 @example
6465 .rept 3
6466 .long 0
6467 .endr
6468 @end example
6469
6470 is equivalent to assembling
6471
6472 @example
6473 .long 0
6474 .long 0
6475 .long 0
6476 @end example
6477
6478 A count of zero is allowed, but nothing is generated. Negative counts are not
6479 allowed and if encountered will be treated as if they were zero.
6480
6481 @node Sbttl
6482 @section @code{.sbttl "@var{subheading}"}
6483
6484 @cindex @code{sbttl} directive
6485 @cindex subtitles for listings
6486 @cindex listing control: subtitle
6487 Use @var{subheading} as the title (third line, immediately after the
6488 title line) when generating assembly listings.
6489
6490 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
6491 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
6492
6493 @ifset COFF
6494 @node Scl
6495 @section @code{.scl @var{class}}
6496
6497 @cindex @code{scl} directive
6498 @cindex symbol storage class (COFF)
6499 @cindex COFF symbol storage class
6500 Set the storage-class value for a symbol. This directive may only be
6501 used inside a @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pair. Storage class may flag
6502 whether a symbol is static or external, or it may record further
6503 symbolic debugging information.
6504 @end ifset
6505
6506 @ifset COFF-ELF
6507 @node Section
6508 @section @code{.section @var{name}}
6509
6510 @cindex named section
6511 Use the @code{.section} directive to assemble the following code into a section
6512 named @var{name}.
6513
6514 This directive is only supported for targets that actually support arbitrarily
6515 named sections; on @code{a.out} targets, for example, it is not accepted, even
6516 with a standard @code{a.out} section name.
6517
6518 @ifset COFF
6519 @ifset ELF
6520 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6521 @subheading COFF Version
6522 @end ifset
6523
6524 @cindex @code{section} directive (COFF version)
6525 For COFF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used in one of the following
6526 ways:
6527
6528 @smallexample
6529 .section @var{name}[, "@var{flags}"]
6530 .section @var{name}[, @var{subsection}]
6531 @end smallexample
6532
6533 If the optional argument is quoted, it is taken as flags to use for the
6534 section. Each flag is a single character. The following flags are recognized:
6535
6536 @table @code
6537 @item b
6538 bss section (uninitialized data)
6539 @item n
6540 section is not loaded
6541 @item w
6542 writable section
6543 @item d
6544 data section
6545 @item e
6546 exclude section from linking
6547 @item r
6548 read-only section
6549 @item x
6550 executable section
6551 @item s
6552 shared section (meaningful for PE targets)
6553 @item a
6554 ignored. (For compatibility with the ELF version)
6555 @item y
6556 section is not readable (meaningful for PE targets)
6557 @item 0-9
6558 single-digit power-of-two section alignment (GNU extension)
6559 @end table
6560
6561 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6562 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to be
6563 loaded and writable. Note the @code{n} and @code{w} flags remove attributes
6564 from the section, rather than adding them, so if they are used on their own it
6565 will be as if no flags had been specified at all.
6566
6567 If the optional argument to the @code{.section} directive is not quoted, it is
6568 taken as a subsection number (@pxref{Sub-Sections}).
6569 @end ifset
6570
6571 @ifset ELF
6572 @ifset COFF
6573 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6574 @subheading ELF Version
6575 @end ifset
6576
6577 @cindex Section Stack
6578 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
6579 @code{.subsection} (@pxref{SubSection}), @code{.pushsection}
6580 (@pxref{PushSection}), @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and
6581 @code{.previous} (@pxref{Previous}).
6582
6583 @cindex @code{section} directive (ELF version)
6584 For ELF targets, the @code{.section} directive is used like this:
6585
6586 @smallexample
6587 .section @var{name} [, "@var{flags}"[, @@@var{type}[,@var{flag_specific_arguments}]]]
6588 @end smallexample
6589
6590 @anchor{Section Name Substitutions}
6591 @kindex --sectname-subst
6592 @cindex section name substitution
6593 If the @samp{--sectname-subst} command-line option is provided, the @var{name}
6594 argument may contain a substitution sequence. Only @code{%S} is supported
6595 at the moment, and substitutes the current section name. For example:
6596
6597 @smallexample
6598 .macro exception_code
6599 .section %S.exception
6600 [exception code here]
6601 .previous
6602 .endm
6603
6604 .text
6605 [code]
6606 exception_code
6607 [...]
6608
6609 .section .init
6610 [init code]
6611 exception_code
6612 [...]
6613 @end smallexample
6614
6615 The two @code{exception_code} invocations above would create the
6616 @code{.text.exception} and @code{.init.exception} sections respectively.
6617 This is useful e.g. to discriminate between ancillary sections that are
6618 tied to setup code to be discarded after use from ancillary sections that
6619 need to stay resident without having to define multiple @code{exception_code}
6620 macros just for that purpose.
6621
6622 The optional @var{flags} argument is a quoted string which may contain any
6623 combination of the following characters:
6624
6625 @table @code
6626 @item a
6627 section is allocatable
6628 @item d
6629 section is a GNU_MBIND section
6630 @item e
6631 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6632 @item o
6633 section references a symbol defined in another section (the linked-to
6634 section) in the same file.
6635 @item w
6636 section is writable
6637 @item x
6638 section is executable
6639 @item M
6640 section is mergeable
6641 @item S
6642 section contains zero terminated strings
6643 @item G
6644 section is a member of a section group
6645 @item T
6646 section is used for thread-local-storage
6647 @item ?
6648 section is a member of the previously-current section's group, if any
6649 @item @code{<number>}
6650 a numeric value indicating the bits to be set in the ELF section header's flags
6651 field. Note - if one or more of the alphabetic characters described above is
6652 also included in the flags field, their bit values will be ORed into the
6653 resulting value.
6654 @item @code{<target specific>}
6655 some targets extend this list with their own flag characters
6656 @end table
6657
6658 Note - once a section's flags have been set they cannot be changed. There are
6659 a few exceptions to this rule however. Processor and application specific
6660 flags can be added to an already defined section. The @code{.interp},
6661 @code{.strtab} and @code{.symtab} sections can have the allocate flag
6662 (@code{a}) set after they are initially defined, and the @code{.note-GNU-stack}
6663 section may have the executable (@code{x}) flag added.
6664
6665 The optional @var{type} argument may contain one of the following constants:
6666
6667 @table @code
6668 @item @@progbits
6669 section contains data
6670 @item @@nobits
6671 section does not contain data (i.e., section only occupies space)
6672 @item @@note
6673 section contains data which is used by things other than the program
6674 @item @@init_array
6675 section contains an array of pointers to init functions
6676 @item @@fini_array
6677 section contains an array of pointers to finish functions
6678 @item @@preinit_array
6679 section contains an array of pointers to pre-init functions
6680 @item @@@code{<number>}
6681 a numeric value to be set as the ELF section header's type field.
6682 @item @@@code{<target specific>}
6683 some targets extend this list with their own types
6684 @end table
6685
6686 Many targets only support the first three section types. The type may be
6687 enclosed in double quotes if necessary.
6688
6689 Note on targets where the @code{@@} character is the start of a comment (eg
6690 ARM) then another character is used instead. For example the ARM port uses the
6691 @code{%} character.
6692
6693 Note - some sections, eg @code{.text} and @code{.data} are considered to be
6694 special and have fixed types. Any attempt to declare them with a different
6695 type will generate an error from the assembler.
6696
6697 If @var{flags} contains the @code{M} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6698 be specified as well as an extra argument---@var{entsize}---like this:
6699
6700 @smallexample
6701 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"M, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}
6702 @end smallexample
6703
6704 Sections with the @code{M} flag but not @code{S} flag must contain fixed size
6705 constants, each @var{entsize} octets long. Sections with both @code{M} and
6706 @code{S} must contain zero terminated strings where each character is
6707 @var{entsize} bytes long. The linker may remove duplicates within sections with
6708 the same name, same entity size and same flags. @var{entsize} must be an
6709 absolute expression. For sections with both @code{M} and @code{S}, a string
6710 which is a suffix of a larger string is considered a duplicate. Thus
6711 @code{"def"} will be merged with @code{"abcdef"}; A reference to the first
6712 @code{"def"} will be changed to a reference to @code{"abcdef"+3}.
6713
6714 If @var{flags} contains the @code{o} flag, then the @var{type} argument
6715 must be present along with an additional field like this:
6716
6717 @smallexample
6718 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"o,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName}
6719 @end smallexample
6720
6721 The @var{SymbolName} field specifies the symbol name which the section
6722 references.
6723
6724 Note: If both the @var{M} and @var{o} flags are present, then the fields
6725 for the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6726
6727 @smallexample
6728 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"Mo,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{SymbolName}
6729 @end smallexample
6730
6731 If @var{flags} contains the @code{G} symbol then the @var{type} argument must
6732 be present along with an additional field like this:
6733
6734 @smallexample
6735 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"G, @@@var{type}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6736 @end smallexample
6737
6738 The @var{GroupName} field specifies the name of the section group to which this
6739 particular section belongs. The optional linkage field can contain:
6740
6741 @table @code
6742 @item comdat
6743 indicates that only one copy of this section should be retained
6744 @item .gnu.linkonce
6745 an alias for comdat
6746 @end table
6747
6748 Note: if both the @var{M} and @var{G} flags are present then the fields for
6749 the Merge flag should come first, like this:
6750
6751 @smallexample
6752 .section @var{name} , "@var{flags}"MG, @@@var{type}, @var{entsize}, @var{GroupName}[, @var{linkage}]
6753 @end smallexample
6754
6755 If both @code{o} flag and @code{G} flag are present, then the
6756 @var{SymbolName} field for @code{o} comes first, like this:
6757
6758 @smallexample
6759 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"oG,@@@var{type},@var{SymbolName},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}]
6760 @end smallexample
6761
6762 If @var{flags} contains the @code{?} symbol then it may not also contain the
6763 @code{G} symbol and the @var{GroupName} or @var{linkage} fields should not be
6764 present. Instead, @code{?} says to consider the section that's current before
6765 this directive. If that section used @code{G}, then the new section will use
6766 @code{G} with those same @var{GroupName} and @var{linkage} fields implicitly.
6767 If not, then the @code{?} symbol has no effect.
6768
6769 The optional @var{unique,@code{<number>}} argument must come last. It
6770 assigns @var{@code{<number>}} as a unique section ID to distinguish
6771 different sections with the same section name like these:
6772
6773 @smallexample
6774 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}",@@@var{type},@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6775 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"G,@@@var{type},@var{GroupName},[@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6776 .section @var{name},"@var{flags}"MG,@@@var{type},@var{entsize},@var{GroupName}[,@var{linkage}],@var{unique,@code{<number>}}
6777 @end smallexample
6778
6779 The valid values of @var{@code{<number>}} are between 0 and 4294967295.
6780
6781 If no flags are specified, the default flags depend upon the section name. If
6782 the section name is not recognized, the default will be for the section to have
6783 none of the above flags: it will not be allocated in memory, nor writable, nor
6784 executable. The section will contain data.
6785
6786 For ELF targets, the assembler supports another type of @code{.section}
6787 directive for compatibility with the Solaris assembler:
6788
6789 @smallexample
6790 .section "@var{name}"[, @var{flags}...]
6791 @end smallexample
6792
6793 Note that the section name is quoted. There may be a sequence of comma
6794 separated flags:
6795
6796 @table @code
6797 @item #alloc
6798 section is allocatable
6799 @item #write
6800 section is writable
6801 @item #execinstr
6802 section is executable
6803 @item #exclude
6804 section is excluded from executable and shared library.
6805 @item #tls
6806 section is used for thread local storage
6807 @end table
6808
6809 This directive replaces the current section and subsection. See the
6810 contents of the gas testsuite directory @code{gas/testsuite/gas/elf} for
6811 some examples of how this directive and the other section stack directives
6812 work.
6813 @end ifset
6814 @end ifset
6815
6816 @node Set
6817 @section @code{.set @var{symbol}, @var{expression}}
6818
6819 @cindex @code{set} directive
6820 @cindex symbol value, setting
6821 Set the value of @var{symbol} to @var{expression}. This
6822 changes @var{symbol}'s value and type to conform to
6823 @var{expression}. If @var{symbol} was flagged as external, it remains
6824 flagged (@pxref{Symbol Attributes}).
6825
6826 You may @code{.set} a symbol many times in the same assembly provided that the
6827 values given to the symbol are constants. Values that are based on expressions
6828 involving other symbols are allowed, but some targets may restrict this to only
6829 being done once per assembly. This is because those targets do not set the
6830 addresses of symbols at assembly time, but rather delay the assignment until a
6831 final link is performed. This allows the linker a chance to change the code in
6832 the files, changing the location of, and the relative distance between, various
6833 different symbols.
6834
6835 If you @code{.set} a global symbol, the value stored in the object
6836 file is the last value stored into it.
6837
6838 @ifset Z80
6839 On Z80 @code{set} is a real instruction, use @code{.set} or
6840 @samp{@var{symbol} defl @var{expression}} instead.
6841 @end ifset
6842
6843 @node Short
6844 @section @code{.short @var{expressions}}
6845
6846 @cindex @code{short} directive
6847 @ifset GENERIC
6848 @code{.short} is normally the same as @samp{.word}.
6849 @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6850
6851 In some configurations, however, @code{.short} and @code{.word} generate
6852 numbers of different lengths. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6853 @end ifset
6854 @ifclear GENERIC
6855 @ifset W16
6856 @code{.short} is the same as @samp{.word}. @xref{Word,,@code{.word}}.
6857 @end ifset
6858 @ifset W32
6859 This expects zero or more @var{expressions}, and emits
6860 a 16 bit number for each.
6861 @end ifset
6862 @end ifclear
6863
6864 @node Single
6865 @section @code{.single @var{flonums}}
6866
6867 @cindex @code{single} directive
6868 @cindex floating point numbers (single)
6869 This directive assembles zero or more flonums, separated by commas. It
6870 has the same effect as @code{.float}.
6871 @ifset GENERIC
6872 The exact kind of floating point numbers emitted depends on how
6873 @command{@value{AS}} is configured. @xref{Machine Dependencies}.
6874 @end ifset
6875 @ifclear GENERIC
6876 @ifset IEEEFLOAT
6877 On the @value{TARGET} family, @code{.single} emits 32-bit floating point
6878 numbers in @sc{ieee} format.
6879 @end ifset
6880 @end ifclear
6881
6882 @ifset COFF-ELF
6883 @node Size
6884 @section @code{.size}
6885
6886 This directive is used to set the size associated with a symbol.
6887
6888 @ifset COFF
6889 @ifset ELF
6890 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6891 @subheading COFF Version
6892 @end ifset
6893
6894 @cindex @code{size} directive (COFF version)
6895 For COFF targets, the @code{.size} directive is only permitted inside
6896 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
6897
6898 @smallexample
6899 .size @var{expression}
6900 @end smallexample
6901
6902 @end ifset
6903
6904 @ifset ELF
6905 @ifset COFF
6906 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
6907 @subheading ELF Version
6908 @end ifset
6909
6910 @cindex @code{size} directive (ELF version)
6911 For ELF targets, the @code{.size} directive is used like this:
6912
6913 @smallexample
6914 .size @var{name} , @var{expression}
6915 @end smallexample
6916
6917 This directive sets the size associated with a symbol @var{name}.
6918 The size in bytes is computed from @var{expression} which can make use of label
6919 arithmetic. This directive is typically used to set the size of function
6920 symbols.
6921 @end ifset
6922 @end ifset
6923
6924 @ifclear no-space-dir
6925 @node Skip
6926 @section @code{.skip @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6927
6928 @cindex @code{skip} directive
6929 @cindex filling memory
6930 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6931 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma and
6932 @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same as
6933 @samp{.space}.
6934 @end ifclear
6935
6936 @node Sleb128
6937 @section @code{.sleb128 @var{expressions}}
6938
6939 @cindex @code{sleb128} directive
6940 @var{sleb128} stands for ``signed little endian base 128.'' This is a
6941 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
6942 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Uleb128, ,@code{.uleb128}}.
6943
6944 @ifclear no-space-dir
6945 @node Space
6946 @section @code{.space @var{size} [,@var{fill}]}
6947
6948 @cindex @code{space} directive
6949 @cindex filling memory
6950 This directive emits @var{size} bytes, each of value @var{fill}. Both
6951 @var{size} and @var{fill} are absolute expressions. If the comma
6952 and @var{fill} are omitted, @var{fill} is assumed to be zero. This is the same
6953 as @samp{.skip}.
6954
6955 @ifset HPPA
6956 @quotation
6957 @emph{Warning:} @code{.space} has a completely different meaning for HPPA
6958 targets; use @code{.block} as a substitute. See @cite{HP9000 Series 800
6959 Assembly Language Reference Manual} (HP 92432-90001) for the meaning of the
6960 @code{.space} directive. @xref{HPPA Directives,,HPPA Assembler Directives},
6961 for a summary.
6962 @end quotation
6963 @end ifset
6964 @end ifclear
6965
6966 @ifset have-stabs
6967 @node Stab
6968 @section @code{.stabd, .stabn, .stabs}
6969
6970 @cindex symbolic debuggers, information for
6971 @cindex @code{stab@var{x}} directives
6972 There are three directives that begin @samp{.stab}.
6973 All emit symbols (@pxref{Symbols}), for use by symbolic debuggers.
6974 The symbols are not entered in the @command{@value{AS}} hash table: they
6975 cannot be referenced elsewhere in the source file.
6976 Up to five fields are required:
6977
6978 @table @var
6979 @item string
6980 This is the symbol's name. It may contain any character except
6981 @samp{\000}, so is more general than ordinary symbol names. Some
6982 debuggers used to code arbitrarily complex structures into symbol names
6983 using this field.
6984
6985 @item type
6986 An absolute expression. The symbol's type is set to the low 8 bits of
6987 this expression. Any bit pattern is permitted, but @code{@value{LD}}
6988 and debuggers choke on silly bit patterns.
6989
6990 @item other
6991 An absolute expression. The symbol's ``other'' attribute is set to the
6992 low 8 bits of this expression.
6993
6994 @item desc
6995 An absolute expression. The symbol's descriptor is set to the low 16
6996 bits of this expression.
6997
6998 @item value
6999 An absolute expression which becomes the symbol's value.
7000 @end table
7001
7002 If a warning is detected while reading a @code{.stabd}, @code{.stabn},
7003 or @code{.stabs} statement, the symbol has probably already been created;
7004 you get a half-formed symbol in your object file. This is
7005 compatible with earlier assemblers!
7006
7007 @table @code
7008 @cindex @code{stabd} directive
7009 @item .stabd @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc}
7010
7011 The ``name'' of the symbol generated is not even an empty string.
7012 It is a null pointer, for compatibility. Older assemblers used a
7013 null pointer so they didn't waste space in object files with empty
7014 strings.
7015
7016 The symbol's value is set to the location counter,
7017 relocatably. When your program is linked, the value of this symbol
7018 is the address of the location counter when the @code{.stabd} was
7019 assembled.
7020
7021 @cindex @code{stabn} directive
7022 @item .stabn @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7023 The name of the symbol is set to the empty string @code{""}.
7024
7025 @cindex @code{stabs} directive
7026 @item .stabs @var{string} , @var{type} , @var{other} , @var{desc} , @var{value}
7027 All five fields are specified.
7028 @end table
7029 @end ifset
7030 @c end have-stabs
7031
7032 @node String
7033 @section @code{.string} "@var{str}", @code{.string8} "@var{str}", @code{.string16}
7034 "@var{str}", @code{.string32} "@var{str}", @code{.string64} "@var{str}"
7035
7036 @cindex string, copying to object file
7037 @cindex string8, copying to object file
7038 @cindex string16, copying to object file
7039 @cindex string32, copying to object file
7040 @cindex string64, copying to object file
7041 @cindex @code{string} directive
7042 @cindex @code{string8} directive
7043 @cindex @code{string16} directive
7044 @cindex @code{string32} directive
7045 @cindex @code{string64} directive
7046
7047 Copy the characters in @var{str} to the object file. You may specify more than
7048 one string to copy, separated by commas. Unless otherwise specified for a
7049 particular machine, the assembler marks the end of each string with a 0 byte.
7050 You can use any of the escape sequences described in @ref{Strings,,Strings}.
7051
7052 The variants @code{string16}, @code{string32} and @code{string64} differ from
7053 the @code{string} pseudo opcode in that each 8-bit character from @var{str} is
7054 copied and expanded to 16, 32 or 64 bits respectively. The expanded characters
7055 are stored in target endianness byte order.
7056
7057 Example:
7058 @smallexample
7059 .string32 "BYE"
7060 expands to:
7061 .string "B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E\0\0\0" /* On little endian targets. */
7062 .string "\0\0\0B\0\0\0Y\0\0\0E" /* On big endian targets. */
7063 @end smallexample
7064
7065
7066 @node Struct
7067 @section @code{.struct @var{expression}}
7068
7069 @cindex @code{struct} directive
7070 Switch to the absolute section, and set the section offset to @var{expression},
7071 which must be an absolute expression. You might use this as follows:
7072 @smallexample
7073 .struct 0
7074 field1:
7075 .struct field1 + 4
7076 field2:
7077 .struct field2 + 4
7078 field3:
7079 @end smallexample
7080 This would define the symbol @code{field1} to have the value 0, the symbol
7081 @code{field2} to have the value 4, and the symbol @code{field3} to have the
7082 value 8. Assembly would be left in the absolute section, and you would need to
7083 use a @code{.section} directive of some sort to change to some other section
7084 before further assembly.
7085
7086 @ifset ELF
7087 @node SubSection
7088 @section @code{.subsection @var{name}}
7089
7090 @cindex @code{subsection} directive
7091 @cindex Section Stack
7092 This is one of the ELF section stack manipulation directives. The others are
7093 @code{.section} (@pxref{Section}), @code{.pushsection} (@pxref{PushSection}),
7094 @code{.popsection} (@pxref{PopSection}), and @code{.previous}
7095 (@pxref{Previous}).
7096
7097 This directive replaces the current subsection with @code{name}. The current
7098 section is not changed. The replaced subsection is put onto the section stack
7099 in place of the then current top of stack subsection.
7100 @end ifset
7101
7102 @ifset ELF
7103 @node Symver
7104 @section @code{.symver}
7105 @cindex @code{symver} directive
7106 @cindex symbol versioning
7107 @cindex versions of symbols
7108 Use the @code{.symver} directive to bind symbols to specific version nodes
7109 within a source file. This is only supported on ELF platforms, and is
7110 typically used when assembling files to be linked into a shared library.
7111 There are cases where it may make sense to use this in objects to be bound
7112 into an application itself so as to override a versioned symbol from a
7113 shared library.
7114
7115 For ELF targets, the @code{.symver} directive can be used like this:
7116 @smallexample
7117 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@nodename}[ ,@var{visibility}]
7118 @end smallexample
7119 If the original symbol @var{name} is defined within the file
7120 being assembled, the @code{.symver} directive effectively creates a symbol
7121 alias with the name @var{name2@@nodename}, and in fact the main reason that we
7122 just don't try and create a regular alias is that the @var{@@} character isn't
7123 permitted in symbol names. The @var{name2} part of the name is the actual name
7124 of the symbol by which it will be externally referenced. The name @var{name}
7125 itself is merely a name of convenience that is used so that it is possible to
7126 have definitions for multiple versions of a function within a single source
7127 file, and so that the compiler can unambiguously know which version of a
7128 function is being mentioned. The @var{nodename} portion of the alias should be
7129 the name of a node specified in the version script supplied to the linker when
7130 building a shared library. If you are attempting to override a versioned
7131 symbol from a shared library, then @var{nodename} should correspond to the
7132 nodename of the symbol you are trying to override. The optional argument
7133 @var{visibility} updates the visibility of the original symbol. The valid
7134 visibilities are @code{local}, @code{hidden}, and @code{remove}. The
7135 @code{local} visibility makes the original symbol a local symbol
7136 (@pxref{Local}). The @code{hidden} visibility sets the visibility of the
7137 original symbol to @code{hidden} (@pxref{Hidden}). The @code{remove}
7138 visibility removes the original symbol from the symbol table. If visibility
7139 isn't specified, the original symbol is unchanged.
7140
7141 If the symbol @var{name} is not defined within the file being assembled, all
7142 references to @var{name} will be changed to @var{name2@@nodename}. If no
7143 reference to @var{name} is made, @var{name2@@nodename} will be removed from the
7144 symbol table.
7145
7146 Another usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7147 @smallexample
7148 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@nodename}
7149 @end smallexample
7150 In this case, the symbol @var{name} must exist and be defined within
7151 the file being assembled. It is similar to @var{name2@@nodename}. The
7152 difference is @var{name2@@@@nodename} will also be used to resolve
7153 references to @var{name2} by the linker.
7154
7155 The third usage of the @code{.symver} directive is:
7156 @smallexample
7157 .symver @var{name}, @var{name2@@@@@@nodename}
7158 @end smallexample
7159 When @var{name} is not defined within the
7160 file being assembled, it is treated as @var{name2@@nodename}. When
7161 @var{name} is defined within the file being assembled, the symbol
7162 name, @var{name}, will be changed to @var{name2@@@@nodename}.
7163 @end ifset
7164
7165 @ifset COFF
7166 @node Tag
7167 @section @code{.tag @var{structname}}
7168
7169 @cindex COFF structure debugging
7170 @cindex structure debugging, COFF
7171 @cindex @code{tag} directive
7172 This directive is generated by compilers to include auxiliary debugging
7173 information in the symbol table. It is only permitted inside
7174 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. Tags are used to link structure
7175 definitions in the symbol table with instances of those structures.
7176 @end ifset
7177
7178 @node Text
7179 @section @code{.text @var{subsection}}
7180
7181 @cindex @code{text} directive
7182 Tells @command{@value{AS}} to assemble the following statements onto the end of
7183 the text subsection numbered @var{subsection}, which is an absolute
7184 expression. If @var{subsection} is omitted, subsection number zero
7185 is used.
7186
7187 @node Title
7188 @section @code{.title "@var{heading}"}
7189
7190 @cindex @code{title} directive
7191 @cindex listing control: title line
7192 Use @var{heading} as the title (second line, immediately after the
7193 source file name and pagenumber) when generating assembly listings.
7194
7195 This directive affects subsequent pages, as well as the current page if
7196 it appears within ten lines of the top of a page.
7197
7198 @ifset COFF-ELF
7199 @node Type
7200 @section @code{.type}
7201
7202 This directive is used to set the type of a symbol.
7203
7204 @ifset COFF
7205 @ifset ELF
7206 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7207 @subheading COFF Version
7208 @end ifset
7209
7210 @cindex COFF symbol type
7211 @cindex symbol type, COFF
7212 @cindex @code{type} directive (COFF version)
7213 For COFF targets, this directive is permitted only within
7214 @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs. It is used like this:
7215
7216 @smallexample
7217 .type @var{int}
7218 @end smallexample
7219
7220 This records the integer @var{int} as the type attribute of a symbol table
7221 entry.
7222
7223 @end ifset
7224
7225 @ifset ELF
7226 @ifset COFF
7227 @c only print the extra heading if both COFF and ELF are set
7228 @subheading ELF Version
7229 @end ifset
7230
7231 @cindex ELF symbol type
7232 @cindex symbol type, ELF
7233 @cindex @code{type} directive (ELF version)
7234 For ELF targets, the @code{.type} directive is used like this:
7235
7236 @smallexample
7237 .type @var{name} , @var{type description}
7238 @end smallexample
7239
7240 This sets the type of symbol @var{name} to be either a
7241 function symbol or an object symbol. There are five different syntaxes
7242 supported for the @var{type description} field, in order to provide
7243 compatibility with various other assemblers.
7244
7245 Because some of the characters used in these syntaxes (such as @samp{@@} and
7246 @samp{#}) are comment characters for some architectures, some of the syntaxes
7247 below do not work on all architectures. The first variant will be accepted by
7248 the GNU assembler on all architectures so that variant should be used for
7249 maximum portability, if you do not need to assemble your code with other
7250 assemblers.
7251
7252 The syntaxes supported are:
7253
7254 @smallexample
7255 .type <name> STT_<TYPE_IN_UPPER_CASE>
7256 .type <name>,#<type>
7257 .type <name>,@@<type>
7258 .type <name>,%<type>
7259 .type <name>,"<type>"
7260 @end smallexample
7261
7262 The types supported are:
7263
7264 @table @gcctabopt
7265 @item STT_FUNC
7266 @itemx function
7267 Mark the symbol as being a function name.
7268
7269 @item STT_GNU_IFUNC
7270 @itemx gnu_indirect_function
7271 Mark the symbol as an indirect function when evaluated during reloc
7272 processing. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU systems).
7273
7274 @item STT_OBJECT
7275 @itemx object
7276 Mark the symbol as being a data object.
7277
7278 @item STT_TLS
7279 @itemx tls_object
7280 Mark the symbol as being a thread-local data object.
7281
7282 @item STT_COMMON
7283 @itemx common
7284 Mark the symbol as being a common data object.
7285
7286 @item STT_NOTYPE
7287 @itemx notype
7288 Does not mark the symbol in any way. It is supported just for completeness.
7289
7290 @item gnu_unique_object
7291 Marks the symbol as being a globally unique data object. The dynamic linker
7292 will make sure that in the entire process there is just one symbol with this
7293 name and type in use. (This is only supported on assemblers targeting GNU
7294 systems).
7295
7296 @end table
7297
7298 Changing between incompatible types other than from/to STT_NOTYPE will
7299 result in a diagnostic. An intermediate change to STT_NOTYPE will silence
7300 this.
7301
7302 Note: Some targets support extra types in addition to those listed above.
7303
7304 @end ifset
7305 @end ifset
7306
7307 @node Uleb128
7308 @section @code{.uleb128 @var{expressions}}
7309
7310 @cindex @code{uleb128} directive
7311 @var{uleb128} stands for ``unsigned little endian base 128.'' This is a
7312 compact, variable length representation of numbers used by the DWARF
7313 symbolic debugging format. @xref{Sleb128, ,@code{.sleb128}}.
7314
7315 @ifset COFF
7316 @node Val
7317 @section @code{.val @var{addr}}
7318
7319 @cindex @code{val} directive
7320 @cindex COFF value attribute
7321 @cindex value attribute, COFF
7322 This directive, permitted only within @code{.def}/@code{.endef} pairs,
7323 records the address @var{addr} as the value attribute of a symbol table
7324 entry.
7325 @end ifset
7326
7327 @ifset ELF
7328 @node Version
7329 @section @code{.version "@var{string}"}
7330
7331 @cindex @code{version} directive
7332 This directive creates a @code{.note} section and places into it an ELF
7333 formatted note of type NT_VERSION. The note's name is set to @code{string}.
7334 @end ifset
7335
7336 @ifset ELF
7337 @node VTableEntry
7338 @section @code{.vtable_entry @var{table}, @var{offset}}
7339
7340 @cindex @code{vtable_entry} directive
7341 This directive finds or creates a symbol @code{table} and creates a
7342 @code{VTABLE_ENTRY} relocation for it with an addend of @code{offset}.
7343
7344 @node VTableInherit
7345 @section @code{.vtable_inherit @var{child}, @var{parent}}
7346
7347 @cindex @code{vtable_inherit} directive
7348 This directive finds the symbol @code{child} and finds or creates the symbol
7349 @code{parent} and then creates a @code{VTABLE_INHERIT} relocation for the
7350 parent whose addend is the value of the child symbol. As a special case the
7351 parent name of @code{0} is treated as referring to the @code{*ABS*} section.
7352 @end ifset
7353
7354 @node Warning
7355 @section @code{.warning "@var{string}"}
7356 @cindex warning directive
7357 Similar to the directive @code{.error}
7358 (@pxref{Error,,@code{.error "@var{string}"}}), but just emits a warning.
7359
7360 @node Weak
7361 @section @code{.weak @var{names}}
7362
7363 @cindex @code{weak} directive
7364 This directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7365 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7366
7367 On COFF targets other than PE, weak symbols are a GNU extension. This
7368 directive sets the weak attribute on the comma separated list of symbol
7369 @code{names}. If the symbols do not already exist, they will be created.
7370
7371 On the PE target, weak symbols are supported natively as weak aliases.
7372 When a weak symbol is created that is not an alias, GAS creates an
7373 alternate symbol to hold the default value.
7374
7375 @node Weakref
7376 @section @code{.weakref @var{alias}, @var{target}}
7377
7378 @cindex @code{weakref} directive
7379 This directive creates an alias to the target symbol that enables the symbol to
7380 be referenced with weak-symbol semantics, but without actually making it weak.
7381 If direct references or definitions of the symbol are present, then the symbol
7382 will not be weak, but if all references to it are through weak references, the
7383 symbol will be marked as weak in the symbol table.
7384
7385 The effect is equivalent to moving all references to the alias to a separate
7386 assembly source file, renaming the alias to the symbol in it, declaring the
7387 symbol as weak there, and running a reloadable link to merge the object files
7388 resulting from the assembly of the new source file and the old source file that
7389 had the references to the alias removed.
7390
7391 The alias itself never makes to the symbol table, and is entirely handled
7392 within the assembler.
7393
7394 @node Word
7395 @section @code{.word @var{expressions}}
7396
7397 @cindex @code{word} directive
7398 This directive expects zero or more @var{expressions}, of any section,
7399 separated by commas.
7400 @ifclear GENERIC
7401 @ifset W32
7402 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 32-bit number.
7403 @end ifset
7404 @ifset W16
7405 For each expression, @command{@value{AS}} emits a 16-bit number.
7406 @end ifset
7407 @end ifclear
7408 @ifset GENERIC
7409
7410 The size of the number emitted, and its byte order,
7411 depend on what target computer the assembly is for.
7412 @end ifset
7413
7414 @c on sparc the "special treatment to support compilers" doesn't
7415 @c happen---32-bit addressability, period; no long/short jumps.
7416 @ifset DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7417 @cindex difference tables altered
7418 @cindex altered difference tables
7419 @quotation
7420 @emph{Warning: Special Treatment to support Compilers}
7421 @end quotation
7422
7423 @ifset GENERIC
7424 Machines with a 32-bit address space, but that do less than 32-bit
7425 addressing, require the following special treatment. If the machine of
7426 interest to you does 32-bit addressing (or doesn't require it;
7427 @pxref{Machine Dependencies}), you can ignore this issue.
7428
7429 @end ifset
7430 In order to assemble compiler output into something that works,
7431 @command{@value{AS}} occasionally does strange things to @samp{.word} directives.
7432 Directives of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2} are often emitted by
7433 compilers as part of jump tables. Therefore, when @command{@value{AS}} assembles a
7434 directive of the form @samp{.word sym1-sym2}, and the difference between
7435 @code{sym1} and @code{sym2} does not fit in 16 bits, @command{@value{AS}}
7436 creates a @dfn{secondary jump table}, immediately before the next label.
7437 This secondary jump table is preceded by a short-jump to the
7438 first byte after the secondary table. This short-jump prevents the flow
7439 of control from accidentally falling into the new table. Inside the
7440 table is a long-jump to @code{sym2}. The original @samp{.word}
7441 contains @code{sym1} minus the address of the long-jump to
7442 @code{sym2}.
7443
7444 If there were several occurrences of @samp{.word sym1-sym2} before the
7445 secondary jump table, all of them are adjusted. If there was a
7446 @samp{.word sym3-sym4}, that also did not fit in sixteen bits, a
7447 long-jump to @code{sym4} is included in the secondary jump table,
7448 and the @code{.word} directives are adjusted to contain @code{sym3}
7449 minus the address of the long-jump to @code{sym4}; and so on, for as many
7450 entries in the original jump table as necessary.
7451
7452 @ifset INTERNALS
7453 @emph{This feature may be disabled by compiling @command{@value{AS}} with the
7454 @samp{-DWORKING_DOT_WORD} option.} This feature is likely to confuse
7455 assembly language programmers.
7456 @end ifset
7457 @end ifset
7458 @c end DIFF-TBL-KLUGE
7459
7460 @ifclear no-space-dir
7461 @node Zero
7462 @section @code{.zero @var{size}}
7463
7464 @cindex @code{zero} directive
7465 @cindex filling memory with zero bytes
7466 This directive emits @var{size} 0-valued bytes. @var{size} must be an absolute
7467 expression. This directive is actually an alias for the @samp{.skip} directive
7468 so it can take an optional second argument of the value to store in the bytes
7469 instead of zero. Using @samp{.zero} in this way would be confusing however.
7470 @end ifclear
7471
7472 @ifset ELF
7473 @node 2byte
7474 @section @code{.2byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7475 @cindex @code{2byte} directive
7476 @cindex two-byte integer
7477 @cindex integer, 2-byte
7478
7479 This directive expects zero or more expressions, separated by commas. If there
7480 are no expressions then the directive does nothing. Otherwise each expression
7481 is evaluated in turn and placed in the next two bytes of the current output
7482 section, using the endian model of the target. If an expression will not fit
7483 in two bytes, a warning message is displayed and the least significant two
7484 bytes of the expression's value are used. If an expression cannot be evaluated
7485 at assembly time then relocations will be generated in order to compute the
7486 value at link time.
7487
7488 This directive does not apply any alignment before or after inserting the
7489 values. As a result of this, if relocations are generated, they may be
7490 different from those used for inserting values with a guaranteed alignment.
7491
7492 This directive is only available for ELF targets,
7493
7494 @node 4byte
7495 @section @code{.4byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7496 @cindex @code{4byte} directive
7497 @cindex four-byte integer
7498 @cindex integer, 4-byte
7499
7500 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, four byte
7501 long values into the output.
7502
7503 @node 8byte
7504 @section @code{.8byte @var{expression} [, @var{expression}]*}
7505 @cindex @code{8byte} directive
7506 @cindex eight-byte integer
7507 @cindex integer, 8-byte
7508
7509 Like the @option{.2byte} directive, except that it inserts unaligned, eight
7510 byte long bignum values into the output.
7511
7512 @end ifset
7513
7514 @node Deprecated
7515 @section Deprecated Directives
7516
7517 @cindex deprecated directives
7518 @cindex obsolescent directives
7519 One day these directives won't work.
7520 They are included for compatibility with older assemblers.
7521 @table @t
7522 @item .abort
7523 @item .line
7524 @end table
7525
7526 @ifset ELF
7527 @node Object Attributes
7528 @chapter Object Attributes
7529 @cindex object attributes
7530
7531 @command{@value{AS}} assembles source files written for a specific architecture
7532 into object files for that architecture. But not all object files are alike.
7533 Many architectures support incompatible variations. For instance, floating
7534 point arguments might be passed in floating point registers if the object file
7535 requires hardware floating point support---or floating point arguments might be
7536 passed in integer registers if the object file supports processors with no
7537 hardware floating point unit. Or, if two objects are built for different
7538 generations of the same architecture, the combination may require the
7539 newer generation at run-time.
7540
7541 This information is useful during and after linking. At link time,
7542 @command{@value{LD}} can warn about incompatible object files. After link
7543 time, tools like @command{gdb} can use it to process the linked file
7544 correctly.
7545
7546 Compatibility information is recorded as a series of object attributes. Each
7547 attribute has a @dfn{vendor}, @dfn{tag}, and @dfn{value}. The vendor is a
7548 string, and indicates who sets the meaning of the tag. The tag is an integer,
7549 and indicates what property the attribute describes. The value may be a string
7550 or an integer, and indicates how the property affects this object. Missing
7551 attributes are the same as attributes with a zero value or empty string value.
7552
7553 Object attributes were developed as part of the ABI for the ARM Architecture.
7554 The file format is documented in @cite{ELF for the ARM Architecture}.
7555
7556 @menu
7557 * GNU Object Attributes:: @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7558 * Defining New Object Attributes:: Defining New Object Attributes
7559 @end menu
7560
7561 @node GNU Object Attributes
7562 @section @sc{gnu} Object Attributes
7563
7564 The @code{.gnu_attribute} directive records an object attribute
7565 with vendor @samp{gnu}.
7566
7567 Except for @samp{Tag_compatibility}, which has both an integer and a string for
7568 its value, @sc{gnu} attributes have a string value if the tag number is odd and
7569 an integer value if the tag number is even. The second bit (@code{@var{tag} &
7570 2} is set for architecture-independent attributes and clear for
7571 architecture-dependent ones.
7572
7573 @subsection Common @sc{gnu} attributes
7574
7575 These attributes are valid on all architectures.
7576
7577 @table @r
7578 @item Tag_compatibility (32)
7579 The compatibility attribute takes an integer flag value and a vendor name. If
7580 the flag value is 0, the file is compatible with other toolchains. If it is 1,
7581 then the file is only compatible with the named toolchain. If it is greater
7582 than 1, the file can only be processed by other toolchains under some private
7583 arrangement indicated by the flag value and the vendor name.
7584 @end table
7585
7586 @subsection M680x0 Attributes
7587
7588 @table @r
7589 @item Tag_GNU_M68K_ABI_FP (4)
7590 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7591
7592 @itemize @bullet
7593 @item
7594 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7595 @item
7596 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7597 @item
7598 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7599 @end itemize
7600 @end table
7601
7602 @subsection MIPS Attributes
7603
7604 @table @r
7605 @item Tag_GNU_MIPS_ABI_FP (4)
7606 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7607
7608 @itemize @bullet
7609 @item
7610 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7611 @item
7612 1 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a standard
7613 double-precision FPU.
7614 @item
7615 2 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a single-precision FPU.
7616 @item
7617 3 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7618 @item
7619 4 for files using the deprecated hardware floating-point ABI which used 64-bit
7620 floating-point registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and increased the
7621 number of callee-saved floating-point registers.
7622 @item
7623 5 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with a double-precision FPU
7624 with either 32-bit or 64-bit floating-point registers and 32-bit
7625 general-purpose registers.
7626 @item
7627 6 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7628 registers and 32-bit general-purpose registers.
7629 @item
7630 7 for files using the hardware floating-point ABI with 64-bit floating-point
7631 registers, 32-bit general-purpose registers and a rule that forbids the
7632 direct use of odd-numbered single-precision floating-point registers.
7633 @end itemize
7634 @end table
7635
7636 @subsection PowerPC Attributes
7637
7638 @table @r
7639 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_FP (4)
7640 The floating-point ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7641
7642 @itemize @bullet
7643 @item
7644 0 for files not affected by the floating-point ABI.
7645 @item
7646 1 for files using double-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7647 @item
7648 2 for files using the software floating-point ABI.
7649 @item
7650 3 for files using single-precision hardware floating-point ABI.
7651 @end itemize
7652
7653 @item Tag_GNU_Power_ABI_Vector (8)
7654 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7655
7656 @itemize @bullet
7657 @item
7658 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7659 @item
7660 1 for files using general purpose registers to pass vectors.
7661 @item
7662 2 for files using AltiVec registers to pass vectors.
7663 @item
7664 3 for files using SPE registers to pass vectors.
7665 @end itemize
7666 @end table
7667
7668 @subsection IBM z Systems Attributes
7669
7670 @table @r
7671 @item Tag_GNU_S390_ABI_Vector (8)
7672 The vector ABI used by this object file. The value will be:
7673
7674 @itemize @bullet
7675 @item
7676 0 for files not affected by the vector ABI.
7677 @item
7678 1 for files using software vector ABI.
7679 @item
7680 2 for files using hardware vector ABI.
7681 @end itemize
7682 @end table
7683
7684 @subsection MSP430 Attributes
7685
7686 @table @r
7687 @item Tag_GNU_MSP430_Data_Region (4)
7688 The data region used by this object file. The value will be:
7689
7690 @itemize @bullet
7691 @item
7692 0 for files not using the large memory model.
7693 @item
7694 1 for files which have been compiled with the condition that all
7695 data is in the lower memory region, i.e. below address 0x10000.
7696 @item
7697 2 for files which allow data to be placed in the full 20-bit memory range.
7698 @end itemize
7699 @end table
7700
7701 @node Defining New Object Attributes
7702 @section Defining New Object Attributes
7703
7704 If you want to define a new @sc{gnu} object attribute, here are the places you
7705 will need to modify. New attributes should be discussed on the @samp{binutils}
7706 mailing list.
7707
7708 @itemize @bullet
7709 @item
7710 This manual, which is the official register of attributes.
7711 @item
7712 The header for your architecture @file{include/elf}, to define the tag.
7713 @item
7714 The @file{bfd} support file for your architecture, to merge the attribute
7715 and issue any appropriate link warnings.
7716 @item
7717 Test cases in @file{ld/testsuite} for merging and link warnings.
7718 @item
7719 @file{binutils/readelf.c} to display your attribute.
7720 @item
7721 GCC, if you want the compiler to mark the attribute automatically.
7722 @end itemize
7723
7724 @end ifset
7725
7726 @ifset GENERIC
7727 @node Machine Dependencies
7728 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7729
7730 @cindex machine dependencies
7731 The machine instruction sets are (almost by definition) different on
7732 each machine where @command{@value{AS}} runs. Floating point representations
7733 vary as well, and @command{@value{AS}} often supports a few additional
7734 directives or command-line options for compatibility with other
7735 assemblers on a particular platform. Finally, some versions of
7736 @command{@value{AS}} support special pseudo-instructions for branch
7737 optimization.
7738
7739 This chapter discusses most of these differences, though it does not
7740 include details on any machine's instruction set. For details on that
7741 subject, see the hardware manufacturer's manual.
7742
7743 @menu
7744 @ifset AARCH64
7745 * AArch64-Dependent:: AArch64 Dependent Features
7746 @end ifset
7747 @ifset ALPHA
7748 * Alpha-Dependent:: Alpha Dependent Features
7749 @end ifset
7750 @ifset ARC
7751 * ARC-Dependent:: ARC Dependent Features
7752 @end ifset
7753 @ifset ARM
7754 * ARM-Dependent:: ARM Dependent Features
7755 @end ifset
7756 @ifset AVR
7757 * AVR-Dependent:: AVR Dependent Features
7758 @end ifset
7759 @ifset Blackfin
7760 * Blackfin-Dependent:: Blackfin Dependent Features
7761 @end ifset
7762 @ifset BPF
7763 * BPF-Dependent:: BPF Dependent Features
7764 @end ifset
7765 @ifset CR16
7766 * CR16-Dependent:: CR16 Dependent Features
7767 @end ifset
7768 @ifset CRIS
7769 * CRIS-Dependent:: CRIS Dependent Features
7770 @end ifset
7771 @ifset CSKY
7772 * C-SKY-Dependent:: C-SKY Dependent Features
7773 @end ifset
7774 @ifset D10V
7775 * D10V-Dependent:: D10V Dependent Features
7776 @end ifset
7777 @ifset D30V
7778 * D30V-Dependent:: D30V Dependent Features
7779 @end ifset
7780 @ifset EPIPHANY
7781 * Epiphany-Dependent:: EPIPHANY Dependent Features
7782 @end ifset
7783 @ifset H8/300
7784 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7785 @end ifset
7786 @ifset HPPA
7787 * HPPA-Dependent:: HPPA Dependent Features
7788 @end ifset
7789 @ifset I80386
7790 * i386-Dependent:: Intel 80386 and AMD x86-64 Dependent Features
7791 @end ifset
7792 @ifset IA64
7793 * IA-64-Dependent:: Intel IA-64 Dependent Features
7794 @end ifset
7795 @ifset IP2K
7796 * IP2K-Dependent:: IP2K Dependent Features
7797 @end ifset
7798 @ifset LM32
7799 * LM32-Dependent:: LM32 Dependent Features
7800 @end ifset
7801 @ifset M32C
7802 * M32C-Dependent:: M32C Dependent Features
7803 @end ifset
7804 @ifset M32R
7805 * M32R-Dependent:: M32R Dependent Features
7806 @end ifset
7807 @ifset M680X0
7808 * M68K-Dependent:: M680x0 Dependent Features
7809 @end ifset
7810 @ifset M68HC11
7811 * M68HC11-Dependent:: M68HC11 and 68HC12 Dependent Features
7812 @end ifset
7813 @ifset S12Z
7814 * S12Z-Dependent:: S12Z Dependent Features
7815 @end ifset
7816 @ifset METAG
7817 * Meta-Dependent :: Meta Dependent Features
7818 @end ifset
7819 @ifset MICROBLAZE
7820 * MicroBlaze-Dependent:: MICROBLAZE Dependent Features
7821 @end ifset
7822 @ifset MIPS
7823 * MIPS-Dependent:: MIPS Dependent Features
7824 @end ifset
7825 @ifset MMIX
7826 * MMIX-Dependent:: MMIX Dependent Features
7827 @end ifset
7828 @ifset MSP430
7829 * MSP430-Dependent:: MSP430 Dependent Features
7830 @end ifset
7831 @ifset NDS32
7832 * NDS32-Dependent:: Andes NDS32 Dependent Features
7833 @end ifset
7834 @ifset NIOSII
7835 * NiosII-Dependent:: Altera Nios II Dependent Features
7836 @end ifset
7837 @ifset NS32K
7838 * NS32K-Dependent:: NS32K Dependent Features
7839 @end ifset
7840 @ifset OPENRISC
7841 * OpenRISC-Dependent:: OpenRISC 1000 Features
7842 @end ifset
7843 @ifset PDP11
7844 * PDP-11-Dependent:: PDP-11 Dependent Features
7845 @end ifset
7846 @ifset PJ
7847 * PJ-Dependent:: picoJava Dependent Features
7848 @end ifset
7849 @ifset PPC
7850 * PPC-Dependent:: PowerPC Dependent Features
7851 @end ifset
7852 @ifset PRU
7853 * PRU-Dependent:: PRU Dependent Features
7854 @end ifset
7855 @ifset RISCV
7856 * RISC-V-Dependent:: RISC-V Dependent Features
7857 @end ifset
7858 @ifset RL78
7859 * RL78-Dependent:: RL78 Dependent Features
7860 @end ifset
7861 @ifset RX
7862 * RX-Dependent:: RX Dependent Features
7863 @end ifset
7864 @ifset S390
7865 * S/390-Dependent:: IBM S/390 Dependent Features
7866 @end ifset
7867 @ifset SCORE
7868 * SCORE-Dependent:: SCORE Dependent Features
7869 @end ifset
7870 @ifset SH
7871 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas / SuperH SH Dependent Features
7872 @end ifset
7873 @ifset SPARC
7874 * Sparc-Dependent:: SPARC Dependent Features
7875 @end ifset
7876 @ifset TIC54X
7877 * TIC54X-Dependent:: TI TMS320C54x Dependent Features
7878 @end ifset
7879 @ifset TIC6X
7880 * TIC6X-Dependent :: TI TMS320C6x Dependent Features
7881 @end ifset
7882 @ifset TILEGX
7883 * TILE-Gx-Dependent :: Tilera TILE-Gx Dependent Features
7884 @end ifset
7885 @ifset TILEPRO
7886 * TILEPro-Dependent :: Tilera TILEPro Dependent Features
7887 @end ifset
7888 @ifset V850
7889 * V850-Dependent:: V850 Dependent Features
7890 @end ifset
7891 @ifset VAX
7892 * Vax-Dependent:: VAX Dependent Features
7893 @end ifset
7894 @ifset VISIUM
7895 * Visium-Dependent:: Visium Dependent Features
7896 @end ifset
7897 @ifset WASM32
7898 * WebAssembly-Dependent:: WebAssembly Dependent Features
7899 @end ifset
7900 @ifset XGATE
7901 * XGATE-Dependent:: XGATE Dependent Features
7902 @end ifset
7903 @ifset XSTORMY16
7904 * XSTORMY16-Dependent:: XStormy16 Dependent Features
7905 @end ifset
7906 @ifset XTENSA
7907 * Xtensa-Dependent:: Xtensa Dependent Features
7908 @end ifset
7909 @ifset Z80
7910 * Z80-Dependent:: Z80 Dependent Features
7911 @end ifset
7912 @ifset Z8000
7913 * Z8000-Dependent:: Z8000 Dependent Features
7914 @end ifset
7915 @end menu
7916
7917 @lowersections
7918 @end ifset
7919
7920 @c The following major nodes are *sections* in the GENERIC version, *chapters*
7921 @c in single-cpu versions. This is mainly achieved by @lowersections. There is a
7922 @c peculiarity: to preserve cross-references, there must be a node called
7923 @c "Machine Dependencies". Hence the conditional nodenames in each
7924 @c major node below. Node defaulting in makeinfo requires adjacency of
7925 @c node and sectioning commands; hence the repetition of @chapter BLAH
7926 @c in both conditional blocks.
7927
7928 @ifset AARCH64
7929 @include c-aarch64.texi
7930 @end ifset
7931
7932 @ifset ALPHA
7933 @include c-alpha.texi
7934 @end ifset
7935
7936 @ifset ARC
7937 @include c-arc.texi
7938 @end ifset
7939
7940 @ifset ARM
7941 @include c-arm.texi
7942 @end ifset
7943
7944 @ifset AVR
7945 @include c-avr.texi
7946 @end ifset
7947
7948 @ifset Blackfin
7949 @include c-bfin.texi
7950 @end ifset
7951
7952 @ifset BPF
7953 @include c-bpf.texi
7954 @end ifset
7955
7956 @ifset CR16
7957 @include c-cr16.texi
7958 @end ifset
7959
7960 @ifset CRIS
7961 @include c-cris.texi
7962 @end ifset
7963
7964 @ifset CSKY
7965 @include c-csky.texi
7966 @end ifset
7967
7968 @ifset Renesas-all
7969 @ifclear GENERIC
7970 @node Machine Dependencies
7971 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
7972
7973 The machine instruction sets are different on each Renesas chip family,
7974 and there are also some syntax differences among the families. This
7975 chapter describes the specific @command{@value{AS}} features for each
7976 family.
7977
7978 @menu
7979 * H8/300-Dependent:: Renesas H8/300 Dependent Features
7980 * SH-Dependent:: Renesas SH Dependent Features
7981 @end menu
7982 @lowersections
7983 @end ifclear
7984 @end ifset
7985
7986 @ifset D10V
7987 @include c-d10v.texi
7988 @end ifset
7989
7990 @ifset D30V
7991 @include c-d30v.texi
7992 @end ifset
7993
7994 @ifset EPIPHANY
7995 @include c-epiphany.texi
7996 @end ifset
7997
7998 @ifset H8/300
7999 @include c-h8300.texi
8000 @end ifset
8001
8002 @ifset HPPA
8003 @include c-hppa.texi
8004 @end ifset
8005
8006 @ifset I80386
8007 @include c-i386.texi
8008 @end ifset
8009
8010 @ifset IA64
8011 @include c-ia64.texi
8012 @end ifset
8013
8014 @ifset IP2K
8015 @include c-ip2k.texi
8016 @end ifset
8017
8018 @ifset LM32
8019 @include c-lm32.texi
8020 @end ifset
8021
8022 @ifset M32C
8023 @include c-m32c.texi
8024 @end ifset
8025
8026 @ifset M32R
8027 @include c-m32r.texi
8028 @end ifset
8029
8030 @ifset M680X0
8031 @include c-m68k.texi
8032 @end ifset
8033
8034 @ifset M68HC11
8035 @include c-m68hc11.texi
8036 @end ifset
8037
8038 @ifset S12Z
8039 @include c-s12z.texi
8040 @end ifset
8041
8042 @ifset METAG
8043 @include c-metag.texi
8044 @end ifset
8045
8046 @ifset MICROBLAZE
8047 @include c-microblaze.texi
8048 @end ifset
8049
8050 @ifset MIPS
8051 @include c-mips.texi
8052 @end ifset
8053
8054 @ifset MMIX
8055 @include c-mmix.texi
8056 @end ifset
8057
8058 @ifset MSP430
8059 @include c-msp430.texi
8060 @end ifset
8061
8062 @ifset NDS32
8063 @include c-nds32.texi
8064 @end ifset
8065
8066 @ifset NIOSII
8067 @include c-nios2.texi
8068 @end ifset
8069
8070 @ifset NS32K
8071 @include c-ns32k.texi
8072 @end ifset
8073
8074 @ifset OPENRISC
8075 @include c-or1k.texi
8076 @end ifset
8077
8078 @ifset PDP11
8079 @include c-pdp11.texi
8080 @end ifset
8081
8082 @ifset PJ
8083 @include c-pj.texi
8084 @end ifset
8085
8086 @ifset PPC
8087 @include c-ppc.texi
8088 @end ifset
8089
8090 @ifset PRU
8091 @include c-pru.texi
8092 @end ifset
8093
8094 @ifset RISCV
8095 @include c-riscv.texi
8096 @end ifset
8097
8098 @ifset RL78
8099 @include c-rl78.texi
8100 @end ifset
8101
8102 @ifset RX
8103 @include c-rx.texi
8104 @end ifset
8105
8106 @ifset S390
8107 @include c-s390.texi
8108 @end ifset
8109
8110 @ifset SCORE
8111 @include c-score.texi
8112 @end ifset
8113
8114 @ifset SH
8115 @include c-sh.texi
8116 @end ifset
8117
8118 @ifset SPARC
8119 @include c-sparc.texi
8120 @end ifset
8121
8122 @ifset TIC54X
8123 @include c-tic54x.texi
8124 @end ifset
8125
8126 @ifset TIC6X
8127 @include c-tic6x.texi
8128 @end ifset
8129
8130 @ifset TILEGX
8131 @include c-tilegx.texi
8132 @end ifset
8133
8134 @ifset TILEPRO
8135 @include c-tilepro.texi
8136 @end ifset
8137
8138 @ifset V850
8139 @include c-v850.texi
8140 @end ifset
8141
8142 @ifset VAX
8143 @include c-vax.texi
8144 @end ifset
8145
8146 @ifset VISIUM
8147 @include c-visium.texi
8148 @end ifset
8149
8150 @ifset WASM32
8151 @include c-wasm32.texi
8152 @end ifset
8153
8154 @ifset XGATE
8155 @include c-xgate.texi
8156 @end ifset
8157
8158 @ifset XSTORMY16
8159 @include c-xstormy16.texi
8160 @end ifset
8161
8162 @ifset XTENSA
8163 @include c-xtensa.texi
8164 @end ifset
8165
8166 @ifset Z80
8167 @include c-z80.texi
8168 @end ifset
8169
8170 @ifset Z8000
8171 @include c-z8k.texi
8172 @end ifset
8173
8174 @ifset GENERIC
8175 @c reverse effect of @down at top of generic Machine-Dep chapter
8176 @raisesections
8177 @end ifset
8178
8179 @node Reporting Bugs
8180 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8181 @cindex bugs in assembler
8182 @cindex reporting bugs in assembler
8183
8184 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{@value{AS}} reliable.
8185
8186 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or it may
8187 not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is to help the
8188 entire community by making the next version of @command{@value{AS}} work better.
8189 Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of @command{@value{AS}}.
8190
8191 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8192 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8193
8194 @menu
8195 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8196 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8197 @end menu
8198
8199 @node Bug Criteria
8200 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8201 @cindex bug criteria
8202
8203 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8204
8205 @itemize @bullet
8206 @cindex fatal signal
8207 @cindex assembler crash
8208 @cindex crash of assembler
8209 @item
8210 If the assembler gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8211 @command{@value{AS}} bug. Reliable assemblers never crash.
8212
8213 @cindex error on valid input
8214 @item
8215 If @command{@value{AS}} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8216
8217 @cindex invalid input
8218 @item
8219 If @command{@value{AS}} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8220 is a bug. However, you should note that your idea of ``invalid input'' might
8221 be our idea of ``an extension'' or ``support for traditional practice''.
8222
8223 @item
8224 If you are an experienced user of assemblers, your suggestions for improvement
8225 of @command{@value{AS}} are welcome in any case.
8226 @end itemize
8227
8228 @node Bug Reporting
8229 @section How to Report Bugs
8230 @cindex bug reports
8231 @cindex assembler bugs, reporting
8232
8233 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu} products. If
8234 you obtained @command{@value{AS}} from a support organization, we recommend you
8235 contact that organization first.
8236
8237 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8238 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8239 distribution.
8240
8241 @ifset BUGURL
8242 In any event, we also recommend that you send bug reports for @command{@value{AS}}
8243 to @value{BUGURL}.
8244 @end ifset
8245
8246 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8247 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8248 fact or leave it out, state it!
8249
8250 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the problem
8251 and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might assume that the
8252 name of a symbol you use in an example does not matter. Well, probably it does
8253 not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps the bug is a stray memory reference which
8254 happens to fetch from the location where that name is stored in memory;
8255 perhaps, if the name were different, the contents of that location would fool
8256 the assembler into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and
8257 give a specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8258 and the most helpful.
8259
8260 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix the bug if
8261 it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports on the assumption
8262 that the bug has not been reported previously.
8263
8264 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8265 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8266 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8267 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8268
8269 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8270
8271 @itemize @bullet
8272 @item
8273 The version of @command{@value{AS}}. @command{@value{AS}} announces it if you start
8274 it with the @samp{--version} argument.
8275
8276 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8277 the bug in the current version of @command{@value{AS}}.
8278
8279 @item
8280 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{@value{AS}} source.
8281
8282 @item
8283 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8284 version number.
8285
8286 @item
8287 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{@value{AS}}---e.g.
8288 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8289
8290 @item
8291 The command arguments you gave the assembler to assemble your example and
8292 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important, list them
8293 all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is sufficient.
8294
8295 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8296 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8297
8298 @item
8299 A complete input file that will reproduce the bug. If the bug is observed when
8300 the assembler is invoked via a compiler, send the assembler source, not the
8301 high level language source. Most compilers will produce the assembler source
8302 when run with the @samp{-S} option. If you are using @code{@value{GCC}}, use
8303 the options @samp{-v --save-temps}; this will save the assembler source in a
8304 file with an extension of @file{.s}, and also show you exactly how
8305 @command{@value{AS}} is being run.
8306
8307 @item
8308 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8309 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8310
8311 Of course, if the bug is that @command{@value{AS}} gets a fatal signal, then we
8312 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might not
8313 notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us a chance to
8314 make a mistake.
8315
8316 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still say so
8317 explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your copy of
8318 @command{@value{AS}} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the C
8319 library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash and ours
8320 would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours fails to crash, we
8321 would know that the bug was not happening for us. If you had not told us to
8322 expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw any conclusion from our
8323 observations.
8324
8325 @item
8326 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{@value{AS}} source, send us context
8327 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or @samp{-p}
8328 option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file. If you even
8329 discuss something in the @command{@value{AS}} source, refer to it by context, not
8330 by line number.
8331
8332 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8333 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8334 @end itemize
8335
8336 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8337
8338 @itemize @bullet
8339 @item
8340 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8341
8342 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8343 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8344 changes will not affect it.
8345
8346 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8347 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8348 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8349 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8350
8351 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8352 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8353 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8354 less time, and so on.
8355
8356 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8357 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8358
8359 @item
8360 A patch for the bug.
8361
8362 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8363 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8364 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8365 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8366
8367 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{@value{AS}} it is very hard to
8368 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path through
8369 the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be able to construct
8370 one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is fixed.
8371
8372 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8373 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8374 help us to understand.
8375
8376 @item
8377 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8378
8379 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8380 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8381 @end itemize
8382
8383 @node Acknowledgements
8384 @chapter Acknowledgements
8385
8386 If you have contributed to GAS and your name isn't listed here,
8387 it is not meant as a slight. We just don't know about it. Send mail to the
8388 maintainer, and we'll correct the situation. Currently
8389 @c (October 2012),
8390 the maintainer is Nick Clifton (email address @code{nickc@@redhat.com}).
8391
8392 Dean Elsner wrote the original @sc{gnu} assembler for the VAX.@footnote{Any
8393 more details?}
8394
8395 Jay Fenlason maintained GAS for a while, adding support for GDB-specific debug
8396 information and the 68k series machines, most of the preprocessing pass, and
8397 extensive changes in @file{messages.c}, @file{input-file.c}, @file{write.c}.
8398
8399 K. Richard Pixley maintained GAS for a while, adding various enhancements and
8400 many bug fixes, including merging support for several processors, breaking GAS
8401 up to handle multiple object file format back ends (including heavy rewrite,
8402 testing, an integration of the coff and b.out back ends), adding configuration
8403 including heavy testing and verification of cross assemblers and file splits
8404 and renaming, converted GAS to strictly ANSI C including full prototypes, added
8405 support for m680[34]0 and cpu32, did considerable work on i960 including a COFF
8406 port (including considerable amounts of reverse engineering), a SPARC opcode
8407 file rewrite, DECstation, rs6000, and hp300hpux host ports, updated ``know''
8408 assertions and made them work, much other reorganization, cleanup, and lint.
8409
8410 Ken Raeburn wrote the high-level BFD interface code to replace most of the code
8411 in format-specific I/O modules.
8412
8413 The original VMS support was contributed by David L. Kashtan. Eric Youngdale
8414 has done much work with it since.
8415
8416 The Intel 80386 machine description was written by Eliot Dresselhaus.
8417
8418 Minh Tran-Le at IntelliCorp contributed some AIX 386 support.
8419
8420 The Motorola 88k machine description was contributed by Devon Bowen of Buffalo
8421 University and Torbjorn Granlund of the Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
8422
8423 Keith Knowles at the Open Software Foundation wrote the original MIPS back end
8424 (@file{tc-mips.c}, @file{tc-mips.h}), and contributed Rose format support
8425 (which hasn't been merged in yet). Ralph Campbell worked with the MIPS code to
8426 support a.out format.
8427
8428 Support for the Zilog Z8k and Renesas H8/300 processors (tc-z8k,
8429 tc-h8300), and IEEE 695 object file format (obj-ieee), was written by
8430 Steve Chamberlain of Cygnus Support. Steve also modified the COFF back end to
8431 use BFD for some low-level operations, for use with the H8/300 and AMD 29k
8432 targets.
8433
8434 John Gilmore built the AMD 29000 support, added @code{.include} support, and
8435 simplified the configuration of which versions accept which directives. He
8436 updated the 68k machine description so that Motorola's opcodes always produced
8437 fixed-size instructions (e.g., @code{jsr}), while synthetic instructions
8438 remained shrinkable (@code{jbsr}). John fixed many bugs, including true tested
8439 cross-compilation support, and one bug in relaxation that took a week and
8440 required the proverbial one-bit fix.
8441
8442 Ian Lance Taylor of Cygnus Support merged the Motorola and MIT syntax for the
8443 68k, completed support for some COFF targets (68k, i386 SVR3, and SCO Unix),
8444 added support for MIPS ECOFF and ELF targets, wrote the initial RS/6000 and
8445 PowerPC assembler, and made a few other minor patches.
8446
8447 Steve Chamberlain made GAS able to generate listings.
8448
8449 Hewlett-Packard contributed support for the HP9000/300.
8450
8451 Jeff Law wrote GAS and BFD support for the native HPPA object format (SOM)
8452 along with a fairly extensive HPPA testsuite (for both SOM and ELF object
8453 formats). This work was supported by both the Center for Software Science at
8454 the University of Utah and Cygnus Support.
8455
8456 Support for ELF format files has been worked on by Mark Eichin of Cygnus
8457 Support (original, incomplete implementation for SPARC), Pete Hoogenboom and
8458 Jeff Law at the University of Utah (HPPA mainly), Michael Meissner of the Open
8459 Software Foundation (i386 mainly), and Ken Raeburn of Cygnus Support (sparc,
8460 and some initial 64-bit support).
8461
8462 Linas Vepstas added GAS support for the ESA/390 ``IBM 370'' architecture.
8463
8464 Richard Henderson rewrote the Alpha assembler. Klaus Kaempf wrote GAS and BFD
8465 support for openVMS/Alpha.
8466
8467 Timothy Wall, Michael Hayes, and Greg Smart contributed to the various tic*
8468 flavors.
8469
8470 David Heine, Sterling Augustine, Bob Wilson and John Ruttenberg from Tensilica,
8471 Inc.@: added support for Xtensa processors.
8472
8473 Several engineers at Cygnus Support have also provided many small bug fixes and
8474 configuration enhancements.
8475
8476 Jon Beniston added support for the Lattice Mico32 architecture.
8477
8478 Many others have contributed large or small bugfixes and enhancements. If
8479 you have contributed significant work and are not mentioned on this list, and
8480 want to be, let us know. Some of the history has been lost; we are not
8481 intentionally leaving anyone out.
8482
8483 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8484 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8485 @include fdl.texi
8486
8487 @node AS Index
8488 @unnumbered AS Index
8489
8490 @printindex cp
8491
8492 @bye
8493 @c Local Variables:
8494 @c fill-column: 79
8495 @c End: